Taskalfa Operation Guide

250ci/300ci/400ci/500ci
OPERATION GUIDE
Please read this Operation Guide before using this machine. Keep it close to the machine for easy reference.
Introduction Thank you for your purchase of Taskalfa 250ci/300ci/400ci/500ci. This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition. Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine, and keep it close to the machine for easy reference. We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine. In this Operation Guide, Taskalfa 250ci/300ci/400ci/500ci are referred to as 25 ppm model, 30 ppm model, 40 ppm model and 50 ppm model respectively.
Included Guides
The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary. Operation Guide (This Guide) Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and troubleshooting. Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality Adjustments to color image quality are explained using sample images.
Safety Conventions in This Guide

The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below. WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points. CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.
Symbols
The symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol. .... [General warning] .... [Warning of danger of electrical shock] .... [Warning of high temperature]
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol. .... [Warning of prohibited action] .... [Disassembly prohibited] The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol. .... [Alert of required action] .... [Remove the power plug from the outlet] .... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
NOTE: An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases
because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
OPERATION GUIDE
Contents
Contents
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Caution / Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x Precautions for Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii SAFETY OF LASER BEAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi 1 Part Names Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Preparation before Use Check bundled items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Switching the Language for Display [Language]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Installing Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Sending E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Loading Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Basic Operation Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Sleep and Auto Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Login/Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Selecting Color Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Enter key and Quick No. Search key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Reserve Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Staple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Punching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Printing - Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Specifying Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Using Document Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Basic Operation for Document Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 Quick Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 Using the Internet Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
ii
OPERATION GUIDE
Contents
Copying Functions Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Mixed Sized Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Output Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 EcoPrint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Single Color Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Color Balance Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Hue Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 One-touch Image Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Sharpness Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Background Density Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Combine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Margin/Centering Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Border Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Booklet from Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Cover Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Page Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Memo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Poster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Image Repeat/Double Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Auto Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Negative Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Job Finish Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 Priority Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Repeat Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 OHP Backing Sheet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 Program (Copying and Sending). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
OPERATION GUIDE
iii
Contents
Sending Functions Original Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Sending Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Centering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Mixed Sized Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 1-sided/2-sided Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 PDF Encryption Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Adjusting Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Background Density Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Border Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Enter Document Name/File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Enter E-mail Subject and Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 WSD Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Job Finish Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Send and Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Send and Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 FTP Encrypted TX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Color Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 About Color Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Document Box Using a Custom Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Using a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Status / Job Cancel Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Sending the Job Log History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Priority Override for Waiting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Reordering Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Device/Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
iv
OPERATION GUIDE
Contents
Default Setting (System Menu) Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Sending Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Document Box/Removable Memory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 Printing Reports/Sending Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49 Adjustment/Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52 Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64 Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69 Internet Browser Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78 Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81 System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-85 Restarting the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-86 Network Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87 Network Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95 Interface Block Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98 Security Level (Security Level setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100 Document Guard Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100 Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102 Maintenance Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Troubleshooting Solving Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Responding to Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Clearing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Management User Login Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Job Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 Data Security Kit Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26 Appendix Optional Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-2 Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-7 Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-10 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-19 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-27 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index-1
10
11
OPERATION GUIDE
Quick Guide
Be sure to read Precautions for Use before using this machine.

Administrator tasks
To make copies
It copies.
To print
It prints.
Simply press the Start key to make copies. You can also fine tune the copy settings by changing the paper size, adjusting the density, etc.
You can print via a network or print a PDF file directly from USB memory.
What you want to do
Copying with specific settings
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory
Print via a network
Connecting Cables
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
Install the printer driver on your computer *1 Setup

Loading Paper...2-16
Placing Originals on the Platen...2-29
Operation
Copying Functions ...4-1
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory... 6-16
Printing Printing from Applications ...3-27
*1: For more information, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide.
vi
OPERATION GUIDE
Administrator tasks
To send documents
It sends.
You can send scanned images via a network. Or, you can also store scanned images in USB memory.
What you want to do
Send as E-mail
Send to Folder (SMB)
Saving Documents to USB Memory
Connecting Cables
Plug the USB memory
Create a shared folder on the destination computer. Setup

Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys)...8-69
Place the originals on the platen
Operation
Sending ...3-29 *1 Sending Functions ...5-1
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ...6-18
*1: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send by entering the address directly.
OPERATION GUIDE
vii
Administrator tasks
To send a FAX
As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines, you can also send a FAX via a network.
It faxes.
NOTE: For more information on setting up and sending a FAX, refer to the FAX
System(Q) Operation Guide.
What you want to do
Send a FAX
FAX directly from a computer
Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine. Selection of Telephone Line (Inch version only) Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
Install the Network FAX Driver on your computer *1 Setup

Selection of Transmit Terminal Identification (TTI)...2-3 on the FAX System(Q) Operation Guide Loading Paper...2-16
*2
Operation
FAX Operation (Basic) ...3-1 on the FAX System(Q) Operation Guide
About Network FAX ...9-1 on the FAX System(Q) Operation Guide
*1:For more information, refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide. *2: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send the FAX by entering the address directly.
viii
OPERATION GUIDE
Caution / Warning Labels

Caution / Warning labels have been attached to the machine at the following locations for safety purposes. Be sufficiently careful to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner.
High temperature inside. Do not touch parts in this area, because there is a danger of getting burned.
Do not touch the support area for the document processor as there is a danger that your fingers or other objects may become caught or pinched, and this can result in injury.
High temperature inside. Do not touch parts in this area, because there is a danger of getting burned.
Label inside the machine (Laser radiation warning)
Do not incinerate toner and toner container. Dangerous sparks may cause burn. High temperature inside. Do not touch parts in this area, because there is a danger of getting burned. OPERATION GUIDE NOTE: Do not remove these labels.
ix
Installation Precautions
Environment
CAUTION
Avoid placing the machine on or in locations which are unstable or not level. Such locations may cause the machine fall down or fall over. This type of situation presents a danger of personal injury or damage to the machine. Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt. If dust or dirt become attached to the power plug, clean the plug to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock. Avoid locations near radiators, heaters or other heat sources, or locations near flammable items to avoid the danger of fire. To keep the machine cool and facilitate changing of parts and maintenance, allow access space as shown below. Leave adequate space, especially around the rear cover, to allow air to be properly ventilated out of the machine.
3 15/16" 10 cm
11 13/16" 30 cm
11 13/16" 30 cm
39 3/8" 100 cm
Other precautions
The service environmental conditions are as follows: Temperature: 50 to 90.5 F (10 to 32.5 C) Humidity: 15 to 80 %
However, adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine. Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight. Avoid locations with vibrations. Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
OPERATION GUIDE
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air. Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged. During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to ones health. If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
Power supply/Grounding the machine
WARNING
Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet. These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock. Plug the power cord securely into the mains power outlet and the power socket on the machine. A buildup of dust around the prongs on the plug or contact between the prongs and metallic objects may cause a fire or electric shock. Incomplete electrical contact could cause overheating and ignition. Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock in case of an electric short. If an earth connection is not possible, contact your service representative.
Other precautions
Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to the machine.
Handling of plastic bags
WARNING
Keep the plastic bags that are used with the machine away from children. The plastic may cling to their nose and mouth causing suffocation.
OPERATION GUIDE
xi
Precautions for Use

Cautions when using the machine
WARNING
Do not place metallic objects or containers with water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or near the machine. This type of situation presents a danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall inside. Do not remove any of the covers from the machine as there is a danger of electrical shock from high voltage parts inside the machine. Do not damage, break or attempt to repair the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on the cord, pull it unnecessarily or cause any other type of damage. These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine or its parts as there is a danger of personal injury, fire, electrical shock or exposure to the laser. If the laser beam escapes, there is a danger of it causing blindness. If the machine becomes excessively hot, smoke appears from the machine, there is an odd smell, or any other abnormal situation occurs, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. Turn the main power switch off immediately, be absolutely certain to remove the power plug from the outlet and then contact your service representative. If anything harmful (paper clips, water, other fluids, etc.) falls into the machine, turn the main power switch off immediately. Next, remove the power plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock. Then contact your service representative. Do not remove or connect the power plug with wet hands, as there is a danger of electrical shock. Always contact your service representative for maintenance or repair of internal parts.
xii
OPERATION GUIDE
CAUTION
Do not pull the power cord when removing it from the outlet. If the power cord is pulled, the wires may become broken and there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. (Always grasp the power plug when removing the power cord from the outlet.) Always remove the power plug from the outlet when moving the machine. If the power cord is damaged, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. Always hold the designated parts only when lifting or moving the machine. If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If the optional Fax kit is installed, note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception. For safety purposes, always remove the power plug from the outlet when performing cleaning operations. If dust accumulates within the machine, there is a danger of fire or other trouble. It is therefore recommended that you consult with your service representative in regard to cleaning of internal parts. This is particularly effective if accomplished prior to seasons of high humidity. Consult with your service representative in regard to the cost of cleaning the internal parts of the machine.
Other precautions
Do not place heavy objects on the machine or cause other damage to the machine. Do not open the front cover, turn off the main power switch, or pull out the power plug during copying. When lifting or moving the machine, contact your service representative. When moving the machine, please turn the four adjusters of the paper feeding unit until they reach the floor in order to stabilize the machine. Do not touch electrical parts, such as connectors or printed circuit boards. They could be damaged by static electricity. Do not attempt to perform any operations not explained in this guide. Caution: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful. This machine comes equipped with an HDD (hard disk drive). Do not attempt to move the machine while the power is still on. Since any resulting shock or vibration may cause damage to the hard disk, be sure to turn off the power before attempting to move the machine. In the event there is a problem with the machines HDD (hard disk drive), stored data may be erased. It is recommended that important data be backed up on a PC or other media. Be also sure to store originals of important documents separately.
OPERATION GUIDE
xiii
Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns. Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children. If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes and skin. If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If coughing develops, contact a physician. If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician. If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness, contact a physician. If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box. If the optional Fax kit is installed and the main power switch is off, transmitting/receiving Fax is disabled. Do not turn off the main power switch, but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep mode.
xiv
OPERATION GUIDE
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations. Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight. Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity. If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose (MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
OPERATION GUIDE
xv
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM

1. Safety of laser beam
This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.
2. The CDRH Act

A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. On this machine, the label is on the right.
xvi
OPERATION GUIDE
3. Optical unit
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is the label located on the cover of the optical unit.
4. Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.
5. Safety switch
The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.
OPERATION GUIDE
xvii
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power

Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source. Attention: Le dbranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre lappareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs sur lappareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas lappareil hors tension.
WARNING
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.
CAUTION The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. * The above warning is valid only in the United States of America.
Radio Tag Technology

In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.
MERCURY WARNING
THE LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS.
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States)

This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
xviii
OPERATION GUIDE
Warranty 250ci / 300ci / 400ci / 500ci COLOR MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY
Kyocera Mita America, Inc. and Kyocera Mita Canada, Ltd. (both referred to as Kyocera) warrant the Customers new color Multifunctional Product (referred to as MFP), and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP, against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year, or 300,000 copies/prints from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period, Kyoceras only obligation and the Customers exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor. This warranty covers Maintenance Kits and the components of Maintenance Kits included with the original MFP for a period of one year or 300,000 copies/prints, whichever first occurs. Maintenance Kits consist of the developing unit, the drum unit, the transfer belt, and the fixing unit. Replacement Maintenance Kits have a 90 day Limited Warranty. This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the Customer) of a new Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase. In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the Kyocera Dealer is not able to provide service, write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera Dealer in your area, or check Kyoceras website at www.kyoceramita.com/us. This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress, (b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies, (c) have been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera Dealer, or (d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed. This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights, which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera. THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.
OPERATION GUIDE
xix
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning

It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner. Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/ scanned. Paper money Bank note Securities Stamp Passport Certificate Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
xx
OPERATION GUIDE
Legal and Safety Information

Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics. Legal Information ..........................................................xxii Regarding Trade Names.............................................. xxiii Energy Saving Control Function ................................. xxvii Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function .............................. xxvii Paper Recycling.......................................................... xxvii Energy Star (ENERGY STAR) Program................... xxvii About this Operation Guide........................................ xxviii
OPERATION GUIDE
xxi
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is prohibited.
xxii
OPERATION GUIDE
Regarding Trade Names

PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation. KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation. Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries. Windows Me, Windows XP and Windows Vista are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U.S.A. and/or other countries. AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. This machine has been developed using embedded real-time operating system Tornado by Wind River Systems, Inc. TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. TypeBankG-B, TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of TypeBank. All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging Inc. Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG. ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Type-face Corporation. UFST MicroType fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine. This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co., Ltd. This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The designations and will not be used in this Operation Guide. This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO., LTD. ACCESS, ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD.in the United States, Japan and other countries. 2008 ACCESS CO., LTD. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
OPERATION GUIDE
xxiii
GPL
Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes (www.fsf.org/copyleft/gpl.html). Please access http://www.kyoceramita.com/gpl for more information on how to make GPL applied codes available.
Open SSLeay License

Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1 2 3
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http:/ /www.openssl.org/) The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)
5 6
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
xxiv
OPERATION GUIDE
Original SSLeay License

Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Youngs, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1 2 3
Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
OPERATION GUIDE
xxv
Monotype Imaging License Agreement

1 2
Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software. You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement. To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces. You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original. This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested. You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software. Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions. The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
6 7
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging. In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.
Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement. written consent of Monotype Imaging.
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior 11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms
and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party. By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
xxvi
OPERATION GUIDE
Energy Saving Control Function

The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep Mode where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time.
Low Power Mode

The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 5 minutes have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. For more information refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 3-4.
Sleep
The device automatically enters Sleep when 30 minutes have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened. For more information see Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 3-5.
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function

This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information see Duplex Copying on page 3-17.
Paper Recycling
This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR) Program

We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.
OPERATION GUIDE
xxvii
About this Operation Guide

This Operation Guide contains the following chapters. Chapter 1 - Part Names Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys. Chapter 2 - Preparation before Use Explains adding paper, placing originals, connecting the machine, and necessary configurations before first use. Chapter 3 - Basic Operation Describes the procedures for basic copying, printing and scanning. Chapter 4 - Copying Functions Describes the functions you can use when copying. Chapter 5 - Sending Functions Describes the functions you can use when sending originals. Chapter 6 - Document Box Provides a basic guide to using document boxes. Chapter 7 - Status / Job Cancel Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission Chapter 8 - Default Setting (System Menu) Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation. Chapter 9 - Maintenance Describes cleaning and toner replacement. Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting Explains how to handle error messages, paper jams and other problems. Chapter 11 - Management Explains user login administration and job accounting. Also describes the procedure for Data Security Kit installation. Appendix Explains how to enter characters, and lists the machine specifications. Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine. Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a glossary of terms.
xxviii
OPERATION GUIDE
Conventions in This Guide

The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description. Convention Bold [Regular] Italic Description Indicates the operation panel keys or a computer screen. Indicates the touch panel keys. Indicates a message displayed on the touch panel. Used to emphasize a key word, phrase or references to additional information. Note Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference. Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid problems. Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown and how to deal with it. Example Press the Start key. Press [OK]. Ready to copy is displayed. For more information refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 3-5.
NOTE:
Important
IMPORTANT:
Caution
CAUTION:
OPERATION GUIDE
xxix
Description of Operation Procedure

In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows: Description in this Operation Guide Press [Copy], [Next] of Quick Setup, [ ] twice, and then [Change] of Original Image.
Actual procedure Press [Copy]. Press [Next] of Quick Setup. Press [ ] twice. Press [Change] of Original Image.
xxx
OPERATION GUIDE
Originals and Paper Sizes

This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes. As with A4, B5 and Letter, which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction, horizontal direction is indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original/paper. Placement direction Vertical direction Indicated size * A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, 16K, Letter, Statement
Original
Paper
For the originals/paper, dimension A is longer than B. Horizontal direction A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, 16KR, Letter-R, Statement-R
B A
Original
Paper
For the originals/paper, dimension A is shorter than B.

* The size of the original/paper that can be used depends on the function and source tray. For further details, refer to the page detailing that function or source tray.
OPERATION GUIDE
xxxi
Icons on the Touch Panel

The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel. Placement direction Vertical direction Originals Paper
Horizontal direction
xxxii
OPERATION GUIDE
1 Part Names
This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys. Operation Panel ............................................................1-2 Machine ........................................................................1-4
OPERATION GUIDE
1-1
Part Names
Operation Panel
Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen. Displays the System Menu. Displays number of sheets printed and number of pages scanned. Displays help guidance. Blinks during printing operation. Blinks while data is transmitted.
Selects auto color mode. Selects full color mode. Selects black and white mode. Displays the Copy screen. Displays the screen for sending. You can also change this to show the address book screen. Displays the Document Box screen. Displays the Application screen. Displays the Program screen.
1-2
OPERATION GUIDE
Part Names
Blinks while data is received. Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk, fax memory or USB memory (general-purpose item). Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped. Displays the Interrupt Copy screen. Ends operation (logs out) on the Administration screen. Puts the machine into Low Power Mode. Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode. Lit when the machine's main power is on.
Numeric keys. Enter numbers and symbols. Clears entered numbers and characters. Recalls already registered destinations and programs for sending. Finalizes numeric key entry, and finalizes screen during setting of functions. Operates linked with the on-screen [OK].
Returns settings to their default states. Cancels or pauses the printing job in progress. Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
OPERATION GUIDE
1-3
Part Names
Machine
1 12
2 4 3 13
14 15 5 6 7 8 9 10 18
16
17
11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Original Cover (Option) Platen Original Size Indicator Plates Slit Glass Left Cover 1 Left Cover 1 Indicator Left Cover 1 Lever Left Cover 2 Indicator Left Cover 2
10 Left Cover 3 11 Handles 12 Clip Holder 13 Operation Panel 14 Error Indicator ... Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped 15 Receive Indicator ... Blinks while data is received 16 Front Cover 17 Cassette 1 18 Cassette 2
1-4
OPERATION GUIDE
Part Names
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28
29 19 Toner Container Release Lever (Magenta) 20 Toner Container (Magenta) 21 Toner Container Release Lever (Cyan) 22 Toner Container (Cyan) 23 Toner Container Release Lever (Yellow) 24 Toner Container (Yellow) 25 Toner Container Release Lever (Black) 26 Toner Container (Black) 27 Cleaning Brush 28 Waste Toner Box 29 Waste Toner Tray 30 Release button
30
OPERATION GUIDE
1-5
Part Names
32 34 33
31
41
42 43 44 45 46
35 36
40
37 31 Top Tray 32 USB Memory Slot (A1) 33 Paper Feed Unit Cover 34 Paper Feed Unit 35 Green Knob 36 Paper Width Adjusting Tab 37 Paper Length Guide 38 Handles 39 Multi Purpose Tray 40 Paper Width Guide 41 Option Interface Slot (OPT2) 42 USB Port (A2) 43 Network Interface Connector 44 USB Interface Connector (B1) 45 Option Interface Slot (OPT1) 46 Main Power Switch
38
39
1-6
OPERATION GUIDE
2 Preparation before Use

This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well as the procedures for loading papers and originals. Check bundled items .........................................................2-2 Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables.......2-3 Connecting Cables........................................................2-5 Switching the Language for Display [Language]...........2-7 Setting Date and Time ..................................................2-8 Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ....................2-10 Installing Software.......................................................2-12 COMMAND CENTER (Settings for Network and Transmission) ....................2-13 Sending E-mail............................................................2-14 Loading Paper.............................................................2-16 Loading Originals ........................................................2-29
OPERATION GUIDE
2-1
Preparation before Use
Check bundled items

Check that the following items have been bundled. Operation Guide (This Guide) Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality CD-ROM(Product Library) CD-ROM(TWAIN compatible application)
Documents Contained in the Included CD-ROM

The following documents are contained in the included CD-ROM (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary. Documents KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide Printer Driver User Guide Network FAX Driver Operation Guide TWAIN/WIA Driver Operation Guide KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide Scan to SMB (PC) Setup Guide PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide
2-2
OPERATION GUIDE
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables

Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables.
Connection Example
Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below. Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)
COMMAND CENTER
Administrators PC
Network Network settings, Scanner default settings, User and destination registration
Send E-mail Sends the image data of scanned originals to the desired recipient as a file attached to an E-mail message.
Printing
MFP
Network USB
Send SMB Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC.
Network
Network FAX (Option)
Network
Network
Send FTP Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP.
FAX (Option)
FAX Network
TWAIN Scanning
WIA Scanning
Network
TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices.
OPERATION GUIDE
2-3
Preparing Necessary Cables

The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC. Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use. Available Standard Interfaces Function Printer/Scanner /Network FAX* Printer Interface Network interface USB interface Necessary Cable LAN (10Base-T or 100Base-TX, Shielded) USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant, Max. 5.0 m, Shielded)
Function available when using optional fax kit. For details on Network FAX, refer to the Fax Kit Operation Guide.
2-4
OPERATION GUIDE
Connecting Cables
Connecting LAN Cable (Optional)
Follow the steps below to connect a LAN cable to the machine.
When the machine is powered up, first press the Power key on the operation panel. Check that the Power indicator and the memory indicator are off. After this, turn off the main power switch.
Check that the indicators are off.
Connect the LAN cable to the network interface located on right side of the body.
3 4
Connect the other end of the cable to the hub. Configure the network. For details, refer to Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-10.
OPERATION GUIDE
2-5
Connecting USB Cable

Follow the steps below to connect a USB cable to the machine.
When the machine is powered up, first press the Power key on the operation panel. Check that the Power indicator and the memory indicator are off. After this, turn off the main power switch.
Check that the indicators are off.
Connect the USB cable to the appropriate interface located on the right side of the body.
3 Connecting the Power Cable
Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet. IMPORTANT: Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
2-6
OPERATION GUIDE
Switching the Language for Display [Language]

Select the language displayed on the touch panel. Use the procedure below to select the language.
2
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Language. Press the key for the language you want to use.
Common Settings - Language Set the language to use for the touch panel display.
English Nederlands
Deutsch
Franais Portugus
Espaol
Italiano
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [OK]. The touch panel language will be changed.
OPERATION GUIDE
2-7
Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation. When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.
NOTE: Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.
Turn on the main power switch.
Press the System Menu key.
3 4
Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Time Zone. Select the region. ] or [ ] to view the next region.
Date/Timer - Time Zone Set time zone. Select the location nearest you.
Time Zone -12:00 International Date Line West -11:00 Midway Island, Samoa -10:00 Hawaii
1/13
NOTE: Press [
5
Summer Time Off On
Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].
-09:00 Alaska -08:00 Pacific Time (US & Canada) -07:00 Arizona
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will not appear.
Press [Change] of Date/Time.
2-8
OPERATION GUIDE
Date/Timer - Date/Time Set the date and time.
Set the date and time. Press [+] or [] in each setting.
2008
Year
10
Month
10
Day
2
Off
10
Hour
10
Minute
31
Second
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
2-9

The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPSec, and AppleTalk. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and other platforms. This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures. For other network settings, refer to the Network Setup on 8-87. TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup ...2-10 AppleTalk Setup ...2-12
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and password, and press [Login]. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password.
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses)

Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Bonjour: Off".
NOTE: Prior to the IP address entries, obtain permission from the network administrator.
Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv4) setting.
1 2 3 4 5
System - IPv4 Set TCP/IP (IPv4).
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting. Press [Change] of TCP/IP. Press [On] and then press [OK]. Press [Change] of IPv4. Press [DHCP].
6
IP Address Subnet Mask On Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
On DHCP
Off Bonjour
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
7 8
Press [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK]. Press [Bonjour].
2-10
OPERATION GUIDE
Press [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK]. numeric keys.
10 Press [IP Address] and enter the address using the 11 Press [Subnet Mask] and enter the address using
the numeric keys.
12 Press [Default Gateway] and enter the address

using the numeric keys.
13 Check if all the address entries are correct and

press [OK].
14 After changing the setting, restart the system or

turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86. DHCP Settings Select whether or not to use the DHCP server. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to specify the DHCP setting.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting. Press [Change] of TCP/IP. Press [On] and then press [OK]. Press [Change] of IPv4. Press [DHCP]. Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK]. After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86.
Bonjour Settings Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to specify the Bonjour setting.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
OPERATION GUIDE
2-11
3 4 5 6 7 8
Press [Change] of TCP/IP. Press [On] and then press [OK]. Press [Change] of IPv4. Press [Bonjour]. Press [On] or [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK]. After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86.
AppleTalk Setup
Select the Apple Talk network connection. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to setup the AppleTalk setting.
1 2 3 4 5
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of AppleTalk. Press [On] or [Off]. Press [OK]. After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86.
Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library CD-ROM (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or FAX transmission from your PC.
NOTE: Installation on Windows XP, Windows 2000, Server 2003 and Windows Vista must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep Mode. Wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep Mode before continuing. See Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 3-4 and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 3-5.
2-12
OPERATION GUIDE
COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)

COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the settings for security, network printing, E-mail transmission and advanced networking.
2
NOTE: Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the FAX, refer
to the Fax Kit Operation Guide. The procedure for accessing COMMAND CENTER is explained below.
1 2
Launch your Web browser. In the Address or Location bar, enter the machines IP address. E.g.) http://192.168.48.21/ The web page displays basic information about the machine and COMMAND CENTER as well as their current status.
Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. The values for each category must be set separately. If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER, enter the correct user name and password to access pages other than the startup page. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.
OPERATION GUIDE
2-13
Sending E-mail
Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments. To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments, check the following: The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended. SMTP Settings Use COMMAND CENTER to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server. If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.
Click Advanced -> SMTP -> General.
2-14
OPERATION GUIDE
Enter the correct settings in each field. The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below. Item SMTP Protocol SMTP Port Number SMTP Server Name Description Enables or disables SMTP protocol. To use E-mail, this protocol must be enabled. Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25. Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name. The maximum length of the SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters. If entering the name, a DNS server address must also be configured. The DNS server address may be entered on the TCP/IP General tab. Enter the default time out for the server in seconds. Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP as the protocol. The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000. Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account. When Other is selected for Authenticate, the login user name set here will be used for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the login user name is 64 characters. When Other is selected for Authenticate, the password set here will be used for authentication. The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters. Enter the timeout (in seconds) if you chose POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol. This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established. Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When the value is 0, the limitation for E-mail size is disabled. Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine, such as the machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters. Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters. Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected. The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters. You can also specify E-mail addresses.
SMTP Server Timeout Authentication Protocol Authenticate as Login User Name
Login Password POP before SMTP Timeout Test E-mail Size Limit Sender Address
Signature
Domain Restriction
Click Submit.
OPERATION GUIDE
2-15
Loading Paper
Paper can be loaded standardly in the two cassettes and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available as an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2).
Before Loading Paper

When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.
1 2 3 4
Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle. Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack swelled. Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the papers. Finally, align the papers on a level, flat table. If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam.
CAUTION: If you copy onto used paper (paper already

used for copying), do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality.
NOTE: If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled,

turn the stack in the cassette upside down. Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems. Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag. If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
NOTE: If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or company name, refer to the Paper on Appendix-10.
2-16
OPERATION GUIDE
Loading Paper in the Cassettes

The 2 standard cassettes will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper. Cassette 1 holds up to 500 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2) or up to 250 sheets of B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m2). Cassette 2 holds up to 500 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 550 sheets of 64 g/m2 plain paper). The following paper sizes are supported: Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.513.5", Letter, Letter-R, Statement, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, Folio, 8K, 16K, and 16K-R. IMPORTANT: For clearer and brighter color copies, use the special color paper. You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such papers may cause paper jams or other faults.) When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-24) The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 163 g/m2. If you are using a paper weight between 106 and 163 g/m2, set the media type to Thick. Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 163 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 163 g/m2.
Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops.
NOTE: Do not pull out more than one cassette at a

time.
Using the paper length guide, move the plate to fit the paper. When loading A4 or smaller paper into cassette 1, lift up the paper length guide. For B4 or larger paper, lower the paper length guide.
NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
OPERATION GUIDE
2-17
Holding the paper width adjusting tab, move the paper width guides to fit the paper.
NOTE: Paper sizes are indicated on the cassettes. To change between inch size and metric size (A, B sizes), follow the steps below to adjust the size switch.
B
1. Holding the paper width adjusting tab, move the paper width guide to a position other than that of the paper. 2. Turn the size switch A 90. > 3. Move the size lever B up (C) or down (I). C:metric size (centimeters) (A, B sizes) I:inch size 4. Turn the size switch 90to lock it. >
Align the paper flush against the left side of the cassette.
2-18
OPERATION GUIDE
IMPORTANT: Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams. Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration below). When loading the paper, keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up. The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size. Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams. Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper. If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper. Insert the appropriate paper size card in the slot to indicate the size of the paper inside.
Gently push the cassette back in.
NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged

period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded in the cassette. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-24.)
OPERATION GUIDE
2-19
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray

The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2) or up to 50 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) lager than A4. The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A3 to A6 and Hagaki and from Ledger to Statement-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R. Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper. IMPORTANT: When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-26.) If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick. The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows. A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 100 sheets B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets Hagaki: 30 sheets OHP film: 10 sheets Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 10 sheets
NOTE: When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-26.
When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-26.
Open the multi purpose tray.
When loading paper sizes from A3 to B4 and Ledger to Legal, extend the support tray section of the multi purpose tray.
2-20
OPERATION GUIDE
Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the paper.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.
IMPORTANT: Keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up. Curled paper must be uncurled before use. Straighten the top edge if it is curled. When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray.
OPERATION GUIDE
2-21
Loading Envelopes
Up to 10 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray. Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows. Acceptable Envelope Hagaki Oufuku Hagaki Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Monarch Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) Envelope DL Envelope C5 Executive Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) ISO B5 Envelope C4 Size 148100 (mm) 148200 (mm) 162114 (mm) 235105 (mm) 3 7/8"7 1/2" 4 1/8"9 1/2" 110220 (mm) 162229 (mm) 7 1/4"10 1/2" 3 7/8"8 7/8" 3 5/8"6 1/2" 176250 (mm) 229324 (mm)
Open the multi purpose tray.
Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the envelope.
2-22
OPERATION GUIDE
For landscape form envelopes, close the flap. Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with the flap facing towards you. For portrait form envelopes, close the flap. Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with the flap facing the insertion slot.
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray

Load envelope with the print side facing up.
Close the flap.
Landscape form envelopes Portrait form envelopes Cardstock (Hagaki) Return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki)
NOTE: Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki).
IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-26.
OPERATION GUIDE
2-23
Specifying Paper Size and Media

The default paper size setting for cassettes 1 and 2, for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder (cassettes 3 and 4) is [Auto], and the default media type setting is [Plain]. To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes, specify the paper size and media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-24.) To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray, specify the paper size setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-26.) Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes 1 or 2 or the optional paper feeder (cassettes 3 and 4), specify the paper size. Also, you use a media type other than plain paper, specify the media type setting. Selection Item Paper Size Auto Selectable Size/Type Paper size is automatically detected and selected. Select whether the paper is in Metric size or in Inch size. Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Inch size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, 8.513.5" and Oficio II Metric size: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, and Folio Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard Sizes 1. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Inch size: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K-R and 16K Metric size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, 8.513.5", Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and 16K Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Rough, Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Recycled, Preprinted**, Bond*, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Thick (106 g/m2 and more)*, High Quality and Custom 1~8*
Standard Sizes 1
Standard Sizes 2
Media Type
**
To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-11. When the paper weight settings shown below are selected, the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected. Bond: Heavy 3 Thick: Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy Custom 1 to 8: Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-15.
2-24
OPERATION GUIDE
NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown
below. Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality and Rough
2 3
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [Next] of Cassette Setting. Cassette Setting, select one of [Cassette 1] to [Cassette 4] and press [Next]. Then press [Change] of Paper Size.
NOTE: [Cassette 3] and [Cassette 4] are shown when

the optional paper feeder is installed.
For automatic detection of the paper size, press [Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit. To select the paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1] or [Standard Sizes 2] and select the paper size.
Common Settings - Paper Size Set cassette paper size.
Auto Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2
Ledger Statement
Letter 8.5x13.5"
Letter OficioII
Legal
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5
Common Settings - Media Type Select type of paper in Cassette 1.
Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears. Press [Change] of Media Type and select the media type. Then press [OK].
Plain Recycled Prepunched Custom 1 Custom 6 Preprinted Letterhead Custom 2 Custom 7
Rough Bond
Vellum Color Thick High Quality Custom 5
Custom 3 Custom 8
Custom 4
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
OPERATION GUIDE
2-25
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray, specify the paper size.When using other than a plain paper, specify the media type. Item Paper Size Auto Standard Sizes 1 Description Paper size is automatically detected and selected. Select whether the paper is in Metric size or in Inch size. Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Inch size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 8.513.5" and Oficio II Metric size: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R and Folio Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard Sizes 1. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Inch size: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R B4-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K-R and 16K Metric size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 8.513.5", Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and 16K Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 Enter the size not included in the standard size. Selectable paper sizes are as follows. Inch size X (Horizontal): 5.83~17" (in 0.01" increments), Y (Vertical): 3.86~11.69" (in 0.01" increments) Metric size X (Horizontal): 148~432 mm (in 1mm increments), Y (Vertical): 98~297 mm (in 1mm increments) Selectable media types are as follows. Plain (105g /m2 or less), Rough, Transparency, Rough, Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted**, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Envelope, Thick (106 g/m2 and more), Coated, High Quality and Custom 1~8
Standard Sizes 2
Others
Size Entry
Media Type
* **
To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-11. To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-15.
2-26
OPERATION GUIDE
NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX, the available media types are as shown below. Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality and Rough
Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [Next] of MP Tray Setting, and then [Change] of Paper Size. For automatic detection of the paper size, press [Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit. To select the paper size, press any of [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size Entry] and select the paper size.
Common Settings - Multi Purpose Tray Setting Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.
Auto Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others Size Entry
Ledger Statement
Letter Executive
Letter 8.5x13.5"
Legal OficioII
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Common Settings - Paper Size Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.
If you have chosen [Size Entry], press [+] or [] to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. You may enter the size directly using the numeric keys by pressing [# Keys].
Y(3.86 - 11.69) "
Auto Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others # Keys Size Entry # Keys X(5.83 - 17.00)
17
11
"
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
OPERATION GUIDE
2-27
Common Settings - Media Type Select type of paper in Multi-Purpose Tray.
Press [Change] of Media Type and select the media type. Then press [OK].
Plain Recycled Prepunched High Quality Custom 5
Transparency Preprinted Letterhead Custom 1 Custom 6
Rough Bond Envelope Custom 2 Custom 7
Vellum Cardstock Thick Custom 3 Custom 8
Labels Color Coated Custom 4
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
2-28
OPERATION GUIDE
Loading Originals
Follow the steps below to load originals for copying, sending or storing.
Placing Originals on the Platen

You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
2
1
Open the original cover.
NOTE: If the optional document processor is installed, open the document processor. Before opening the document processor, be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table. Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened.
Keep the document processor open if the original is 40 mm or thicker.
Place the original. Put the scanning side facedown and align it flush against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point.
Original size indicator plates (Inch models)
OPERATION GUIDE
2-29
(Metric models)
Close the original cover.
IMPORTANT: Do not push the original cover forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass.
NOTE: Shadows may be produced around the edges

and in the middle of open-faced originals.
CAUTION: Do not leave the document processor open

as there is a danger of personal injury.
Loading Originals in the Document Processor

The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are scanned. Part Names of the Document Processor
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Original placement indicator (2) Top cover (3) Original width guides (4) Original table (5) Original eject table
(6) Original stopper
(7)
(7) Opening handle
2-30
OPERATION GUIDE
Originals Supported by the Document Processor The document processor supports the following types of originals. Weight Size Capacity 45 to 160 g/m2 (duplex : 50 to 120 g/m2) Maximum A3 to Minimum A5 Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R Plain paper (80 g/m2), Colored paper, Recycled paper: 100 sheets (Mixed sized originals: 30 sheets) Thick paper (120 g/m2): 66 sheets Thick paper (160 g/m2): 50 sheets Art paper: 1 sheet High quality paper (110 g/m2): 72 sheets
Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Soft originals such as vinyl sheets Transparencies such as OHP film Carbon paper Originals with very slippery surfaces Originals with adhesive tape or glue Wet originals Originals with correction fluid which is not dried Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals Originals with cut-out sections Crumpled paper Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam). Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
How to Load Originals IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals.
OPERATION GUIDE
2-31
Place the originals. Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go. The original placement indicator will be lit.
IMPORTANT: Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam. Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam (see the figure). Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).
Original placement indicator

The original placement indicator is lit or unlit depending on how originals are placed. Indications and their status are as follows. Green (left indicator) lit : Original is placed properly. Green (left indicator) blinking : Original is not placed properly. Remove and place again. Red (right indicator) blinking : Original is jammed. Remove the jammed original and place it properly.
2-32
OPERATION GUIDE
3 Basic Operation
This chapter explains the following operations. Power On/Off ................................................................3-2 Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode ..............3-4 Sleep and Auto Sleep ...................................................3-5 Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ............................3-6 Login/Logout .................................................................3-7 Touch Panel Display ................................................... 3-11 Copying.......................................................................3-12 Reserve Copy .............................................................3-21 Staple ..........................................................................3-23 Punching .....................................................................3-25 Printing - Printing from Applications............................3-27 Sending.......................................................................3-29 Specifying Destination ................................................3-35 Using Document Box ..................................................3-38 Basic Operation for Document Box.............................3-40 Canceling Jobs ...........................................................3-46 Quick Setup Screen ....................................................3-47 Using the Internet Browser .........................................3-50
OPERATION GUIDE
3-1
Basic Operation
Power On/Off
Power On
When the main power indicator is lit... Press the Power key.
When the main power indicator is off... Open the main power switch cover and turn the main power switch on.
NOTE: If the optional Data Security Kit is installed, a message might display indicating the security function is
being activated and time may be taken to start up when the power is turned on.
IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch.
3-2
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Power Off
Before turning off the main power switch, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power key and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch.
CAUTION: The hard disk may be operating when the Power key or Memory indicator is lit or blinking. Turning
off the main power switch while the hard disk is operating may cause damage.
Make sure that the indicators are off.
In case of not using the machine for a extended period of time
CAUTION: If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If the optional Fax kit is installed, note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
CAUTION: Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-3
Basic Operation
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode

Low Power Mode To activate Low Power Mode, press the Energy Saver key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save power except the Energy Saver, Power, and main power indicators. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode. If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode when using the optional fax, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. To resume, perform one of the following actions. The machine will be ready to operate within 30 seconds. Press any key on the operation panel. Open the original cover or the optional document processor. Place originals in the optional document processor.
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
Auto Low Power Mode Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for a preset time. The default preset time is 5 minutes.
3-4
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Sleep and Auto Sleep

Sleep To enter Sleep, press the Power key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep. If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is performed while the touch panel remains unlit. When using the optional fax, received fax data is printed out while the operation panel also remains unlit. To resume, press the Power key. The 25/25 ppm or 30/ 30 ppm model will be ready to use within 30 seconds, while the 40/40 ppm or 50/40 ppm model will be ready within 45 seconds. Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly. Auto Sleep Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time in the Low Power Mode. The default preset time is 30 minutes.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-5
Basic Operation
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle

Adjust the angle of the operation panel in two as shown by releasing the operation panel lock lever.
3-6
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine.
NOTE: You will be unable to log in if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, log in
with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password. Login
1
Enter login user name and password.
Login to: Login User Name Local
If the screen shown appears during operations, press [Login User Name]. Press [# keys] to enter the login data using the numeric keys.
abcdef # Keys
Login Password
******** # Keys
IC Card Login Check Counter

Status
Cancel
Login
10/10/2008 10:10
Enter the login user name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on

Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
Press [Login Password]. Press [# keys] to enter the login data using the numeric keys.
4 5
Enter the password and press [OK]. Check the login user name and password are correct, and press [Login].
NOTE: If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method, either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication destination.
Logout To logout from the machine, press the Logout key to return to the login user name/password entry screen.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-7
Basic Operation
Selecting Color Mode

When you scan and then copy, send or store documents, you can select the color mode used for scanning from the operation panel.
Automatically recognizes whether scanned documents are color or black & white. Scans all documents in full color.
Scans all documents in black & white.
The basic procedure for selecting the color mode is explained below, using an example in which the scanned document is copied.
1 2 3 4 5
Press the Copy key. Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. Press the Auto Color key, Full Color key or Black & White key to select the color mode. Specify the required settings for copying. Press the Start key.
NOTE: You can fine tune the color mode from the touch panel.
Copying: You can use Single Color copying in Cyan, Green, etc. (page 4-15).
Sending/Storing: You can select Auto Color (Color/ Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W) or Grayscale (page 5-24).
You can also change the default color mode for copying and sending/storing. For details, refer to Color Selection (Copy) on page 8-22 or Color Selection (Send/ Store) on page 8-22.
3-8
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Enter key and Quick No. Search key

This section explains how to use the Enter key and Quick No. Search key on the operation panel.
Using the Enter (
) key
The Enter key works in the same way as keys displayed on the touch panel, such as [OK] and [Close]. The Enter symbol ( ) is displayed next to the keys whose operations are carried out by the Enter key (e.g. [ OK], [ Close]). The operation of the Enter key is explained below using copy paper selection as an example. For details of the procedure, refer to Paper Selection on page 4-4.
Ready to copy.
Paper Selection Copies
In the paper selection screen, press the key for the cassette containing the required paper size. The Enter ( ) symbol appears on the [OK] on the touch panel, indicating that the Enter key performs the same action as [OK].
Place original.
Auto Letter Plain Ledger Plain Letter Plain MP Tray Setting
Original Zoom Paper
: --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Letter Plain Letter Plain Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10
Status
To copy using the selected paper, press the Enter key (or [OK]).
Using the Quick No. Search (
) key
Use the Quick No. Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric keys. For example, you can specify the speed dial for a transmission destination or recall a stored program by its program number. The Quick No. Search key performs the same action as the [No.] displayed on the touch panel. The use of the Quick No. Search key is explained below using an example in which a speed dial number is specified and used to select a destination. For more information on speed dialing, refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-35.
Press the Quick No. Search key (or [No.]) in the basic send screen.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-9
Basic Operation
Ready to send.
Place original. Destination A OFFICE B OFFICE C OFFICE On Hook 0001 AAA 0006 FFF Destination
Status
Destination
In the number entry screen, use the numeric keys to enter the speed dial number.
Detail 1234567890
1/10
Address Book E-mail Addr Entry Folder Path Entry FAX No. Entry i-FAX Addr Entry 0010 JJJ Color/ Image Quality
1/100
Enter One Touch key number using # keys. (0001 - 1000) Direct 00 BBB Cancel 0007 GGG HHH Quick Setup 0008 III Original/Sending Data Format 0009 OK 0011
WSD Scan
Advanced Setup
2008/10/10 10:10
If you entered speed dial number between 1 and 3 digits long, press the Enter key (or [OK]). The specified destination appears in the destination list.
NOTE: If you enter a 4-digit speed dial number, the operation in step 3 can be omitted. The basic send screen appears and the specified destination appears in the destinations list.
3-10
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Touch Panel Display

Display for Originals and Paper
The touch panel displays the selected paper source and output tray.
Press Start key to start printing. Press [Cancel] to change settings. Copy Image Copies
1
Original position Output tray
Shortcut 1 Shortcut 2
Paper source
Size/orientation of original and paper
Auto Paper Selection 2-sided >>2-sided Duplex Org./Paper/ Finishing 100% Zoom 2 in 1 Combine Color/ Image Quality Off Staple/Punch Layout/Edit Normal 0 Density
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Original Zoom Paper
: Letter : 100% : Letter Cancel
Shortcut 5
Shortcut 6
Quick Setup
Status
Advanced Setup
10/10/2008 10:10
OPERATION GUIDE
3-11
Basic Operation
Copying
Follow the steps as below for basic copying.
Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator is off.
NOTE: If the touch panel is turned off, press the

Power key and wait for the machine to warm up.
Place the originals on the platen or in the optional document processor.
NOTE: For loading instructions, refer to Loading

Originals on page 2-29.
Ready to copy.
Copy Image
Copies
Shortcut 1
Check that [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection on the touch panel. Paper that matches the size of the original will be selected automatically. To change the paper size, press, [Org./Paper/ Finishing], [Paper Selection] and select the desired paper source.
Shortcut 2 Place original. Shortcut 3 Auto Paper Selection 2-sided >>2-sided Duplex Org./Paper/ Finishing 100% Zoom 2 in 1 Combine Color/ Image Quality Off Staple/Punch Layout/Edit Shortcut 6 Normal 0 Density Shortcut 5
Shortcut 4
Original Zoom Paper
: --: 100% : --Preview
NOTE: Select paper size manually, if necessary,

instead of using automatic paper selection.
10:10
Quick Setup
Status
Advanced Setup
10/10/2008
Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity. Specify the desired number up to 999.
Press the Start key to start copying.
Remove the finished copies from the top tray.
3-12
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Adjusting Density
Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying. Density Adjustment Option Manual Auto Description Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels. Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original.
NOTE: You may choose Auto mode as the default setting (refer to Density on page 8-24).
The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Density Auto Place original. Lighter Normal Darker Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Set the original on the platen and press [Color/ Image Quality] -> [Density]. Adjust density manually pressing [-3] (Lighter) to [+3] (Darker). You can change the density level [-3] (Lighter) to [+3] (Darker) in half-steps. To change density adjustment from Manual to Auto, press [Auto].
-3 Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut

Status
-2 -2.5 -1.5
-1 -0.5
0 +0.5
+1 +1.5
+2 +2.5
+3
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
Press [OK]. Press the Start key. Copying begins.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-13
Basic Operation
Selecting Image Quality

Select image quality suited to the type of original. The table below shows the quality options. Image Quality Option Text+Photo Photo Print Photo Text Map Description For originals with both text and photographs. For photos taken with a camera. For photos printed in magazines, etc. For originals primarily consisting of text. For maps, etc.
The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Original Image Select original image type for best results. Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Set the original on the platen and press [Color/ Image Quality] -> [Original Image]. Select the image quality.
Place original.
Text+Photo Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Text Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Photo
Print Photo
Map
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
3-14
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Zoom Copying
Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available. Auto Zoom
Ledger: 129 % Letter-R A3: 141 % Statement-R: 64 %
Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image suitably to the selected paper size.
A4
A5: 70 %
Manual Zoom Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%.
25 %
400 %
Preset Zoom Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications. The following magnifications are available. Model Inch Models Zoom Level (OriginalCopy) 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (STMT >> Ledger), 154%(STMT >> Legal), 129% (Letter >> Ledger), 121% (Legal >> Ledger), 78% (Legal >> Letter), 77% (Ledger >> Legal), 64% (Ledger >> Letter), 50% (Ledger >> STMT), 25% (Min.) 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3), 141% (A4 >> A3, A5 >> A4), 127% (Folio >> A3), 106% (1115" >> A3), 90% (Folio >> A4), 75% (1115" >> A4), 70% (A3 >> A4, A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.) 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3), 141% (A4 >> A3, B5 >> B4), 122% (A4 >> B4, A5 >> B5), 115% (B4 >> A3, B5 >> A4), 86% (A3 >> B4, A4 >> B5), 81%(B4 >> A4, B5 >> A5), 70% (A3 >> A4, B4 >> B5), 50%, 25% (Min.)
Metric Models
Metric Models (Asia Pacific)
OPERATION GUIDE
3-15
Basic Operation
XY Zoom Select vertical and horizontal magnifications individually. Reduce or enlarge original images in 1% increments between 25% and 400%.
Y
The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Zoom Standard Zoom Place original. XY Zoom
400%
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Set the original on the platen and press [Layout/ Edit] -> [Zoom]. Press [Standard Zoom] to use Auto Zoom. Press [+] or [] to change the displayed magnification as desired. You can also enter the magnification directly using the numeric keys by pressing [# Keys]. When using Preset Zoom, select the key of desired magnification. When using XY Zoom, press [XY Zoom].
Copies
(25 - 400)
400
Max. STMT >>Ledger STMT >>Legal Letter >>Ledger Legal >>Ledger Cancel
%
78%
Legal >>Letter >>Legal >>Letter
200%
# Keys 100% Auto
77% Ledger 64% Ledger
154%
Original Zoom Paper
129%
50%
Ledger >>STMT
121%
25% Min.
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
Press [+] or [] to change the displayed magnifications of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical). You can also enter the magnification directly using the numeric keys by pressing [# Keys]. Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK].
Ready to copy.
Zoom Standard Zoom Place original. XY Zoom # Keys Y Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Copies
(25 - 400)
100
(25 - 400)
100
Top Edge Top Original Orientation
# Keys Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
3-16
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Duplex Copying
Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books. The following modes are available. One-sided to Two-sided
5 4 3 3 5
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.
4
1
Original
Copy
ghi def abc
A
abc
ghi
B
ghi abc def
The following binding options are available. A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated. B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180. Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation when turning the pages.
Original
def
Copy
Two-sided to One-sided
1 1 2
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets. The optional document processor is required. The following binding options are available. Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated. Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180.
Original
Two-sided to Two-sided
5 3 3 5
Copy
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals. The optional document processor is required.
4
1 1
OPERATION GUIDE
Original
Copy
NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided are Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Executive, Statement-R, Oficio II, 8.513.5", A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R and Folio.
3-17
Basic Operation
Book to One-sided
1 2 1 2
Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book original. The following binding options are available.
Original
Copy
Binding Left: Originals with facing pages are copied from left to right. Binding Right: Originals with facing pages are copied from right to left.
NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Two-sided to One-sided and Book to Onesided. Original: Ledger, Letter-R, A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R and 8K. Paper: Letter, A4, B5 and 16K. You may change paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to match that size.
Book to Two-sided
Facing pages -> Two-sided
1 2 3 4
2
Facing pages -> Facing pages

1
0
Produces two-sided copies from an open book original with facing pages.
3
4
3
2
3
4
2
3
NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Book to Two-sided mode. Original: Ledger, Letter-R, A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R and 8K. Paper: Letter, A4 and B5.
Original
Copy
The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Duplex 1-sided >>1-sided Place original. 1-sided >>2-sided 2-sided >>1-sided 2-sided >>2-sided Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Duplex]. Select the desired Duplex option.
Copies
Finishing Top Edge Top Binding Left/Right Binding Top Original Orientation
Book >>1-sided Book >>2-sided
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
3-18
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
If you choose [1-sided>>2-sided] or [2-sided>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the finished copies of Finishing. If you choose [Book>>2-sided], press [Book>>2sided] or [Book>> Book] of Finishing to select the setting for duplex.
Ready to copy.
Duplex 1-sided >>1-sided Place original. 1-sided >>2-sided 2-sided >>1-sided 2-sided >>2-sided Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Copies
Original
If you choose [2-sided>>1-sided], [2-sided>>2-sided], [Book>>1-sided] or [Book>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the originals of Original.
Binding Left/Right
Binding Top
Book >>1-sided Book >>2-sided Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK]. Press [OK]. Press the Start key. Once an original placed on the platen is scanned, replace it with the next one. Then, press the Start key. After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to start copying.
8 9
Collate/Offset Copying
The machine can collate and offset at the same time as it copies. You can use the Collate/Offset copy function for tasks such as those shown below. Collate
3 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 1
Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page number.
Original
Copy
OPERATION GUIDE
3-19
Basic Operation
Offset
3
3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3
When you use offsetting, printed copies are segregated after each set of copies (or after each page).
NOTE: Offsetting requires the optional document

finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher.
Original
Copy (each page)
The procedure for using collate/offset copying is explained below.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Collate/Offset Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Collate/ Offset]. To use collate copying, press [On] of Collate. To use offset copying, press [Each Set] of Offset.
Collate Place original. Off On
Press [OK].
Original Zoom Paper
Offset Off Each Set
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
Ready to copy.
Collate/Offset
Copies
If [Off] is selected for Collate, press [Off] or [Each Page] of Offset.
Collate Place original. Off On
Original Zoom Paper
Offset Off Each Page
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
3-20
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Reserve Copy
This function allows you to reserve the next copy job during printing. Using this function, the original will be scanned while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed. The procedure differs depending on the Reserve Next Priority (refer to page 8-34) Settings. If Reserve Next Priority is set to [On] The Copy function default screen appears on the touch panel during printing.
Ready to copy.
Copy Image Copies
3
1
Place the originals onto the machine for reserving copy, and configure the copy settings.
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 4
Original Zoom Paper
: --: 100% : --Preview
Quick Setup
Status
Advanced Setup
10/10/2008 10:10
Press the Start key. The machine starts scanning the originals. When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed.
If Reserve Next Priority is set to [Off] The Copying screen appears on the touch panel during printing.
Copying...
Job No.: 000021 Scanned Pages Job Name: Doc10102008101031 User Name: ----Printer Setting Copies Scanner Setting Copies
Press [Reserve Next]. The default screen for copying appears.
2
Letter 100% 2-sided Top Edge Top Top Tray Cancel
Status
2/ 24
Letter 2-sided Collate Plain
Reserve Next
10/10/2008 10:10
2 3
Place the originals onto the machine for reserving copy, and configure the copy settings. Press the Start key. The machine starts scanning the originals. When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-21
Basic Operation
Interrupt Copy
This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately. When interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.
NOTE: If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and printing resumes. You can change the delay until interrupt copying is cancelled. Change the delay as required. For more information, refer to Interrupt Clear Timer on page 8-68.
Ready for interrupt copy.
Copy Image Copies
Press the Interrupt key. Ready for interrupt copy. is displayed. The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 4
Original Zoom Paper
: --: 100% : --Preview
Quick Setup
Status
Advanced Setup
10/10/2008 10:10
2 3 4
Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy, and configure the copy settings. Press the Start key to start interrupt copying. When interrupt copying ends, press the Interrupt key. The machine resumes the paused print jobs.
3-22
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Staple
Use this feature to staple your finished copies.
NOTE: Stapling requires the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher. Note also that
saddle stitching (center stapling) requires the folding unit. The following stapling options and orientations are available. Cassette Paper Load Direction
3,000 Sheet Document Finisher
Original Orientation: Top Edge (Back Edge)
3
Cassette Paper Load Direction
Document Finisher
Document Finisher
Original Orientation: Top Edge (Back Edge)
Original Orientation: Left Top Edge (Left top corner)
Original Orientation: Left Top Edge (Left top corner)
OPERATION GUIDE
3-23
Basic Operation
Use the procedure below to produce stapled copies.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Staple/Punch Staple Off Place original. Top Left Top Right 2 staples Left Punch Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Staple/ Punch]. Select the staple position.
Copies
2 staples Top 2 staples Right Bind and Fold 3 holes Left 3 holes Top 3 holes Right Cancel Top Edge Top Original Orientation
NOTE: To use saddle stitching, press [Bind and Fold]. For more information on saddle stitching, refer to Booklet from Sheets on page 4-29.
2 holes Left 2 holes Top 2 holes Right
Off
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK]. Press [OK]. Press the Start key. Copying begins.
6 7
3-24
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Punching
Punch holes in sets of finished copies in preparation for binding.
NOTE: Requires the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher and punching unit.
The orientations of the original and corresponding punch positions are as follows.
Original Copy Orientation of Original Platen Document processor
NOTE: The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and
four-hole punching. Follow the steps as below for punching.
1 2 3
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing]and then press [Staple/Punch].
OPERATION GUIDE
3-25
Basic Operation
Ready to copy.
Staple/Punch Staple Off Place original. Top Left Top Right 2 staples Left Punch Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Copies
4 5
Select the type of hole punching. Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK].
2 staples Top 2 staples Right Bind and Fold 3 holes Left 3 holes Top 3 holes Right Cancel Top Edge Top Original Orientation
2 holes Left 2 holes Top 2 holes Right
Off
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
6 7
Press [OK]. Press the Start key. If the original is placed on the platen. Place the next original and press the Start key. Copying begins. If all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish Scan]. Copying begins.
3-26
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Printing - Printing from Applications

Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.
NOTE: To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied
CD-ROM (Product Library).
1 2 3
Create a document using an application. Click File and select Print in the application. The Print dialog box appears. Click the button next to the Name field and select this machine from the list.
Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box. Enter any number up to 999. When there is more than one document, select Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of the page numbers.
Click Properties button. The Properties dialog box appears.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-27
Basic Operation
Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to select the paper size. To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click the Media Type menu and select the media type.
Click Source and select the paper source.
NOTE: If you choose Auto Select, papers are supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum size and type. To print on special paper such as envelope or thick paper, place it on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray.
Select paper orientation, either Portrait or Landscape, to match the orientation of the document. Selecting Rotate 180 will print the document rotated 180.
Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box.
10 Click OK button to start printing.
3-28
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Sending
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network. A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required. It is recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues. At the same time as you send a scanned image, you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box. To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps: Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine. Use COMMAND CENTER (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of the SMTP server, and the recipient. Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys. When the PC Folder (SMB/FTP) is selected, it is necessary to share the destination folder. For setting-up the PC Folder, contact your administrator. Creating/Registering a Document Box (when a Document Box is selected as the destination) Detailed transmission settings (to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image at the same time)
Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available. Send as E-mail: Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment...page 3-30 Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC...page 3-31 Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server...page 3-31 Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Loads the document data stored in a Custom Box to a PC...Refer to the TWAIN/WIA Driver Operation Guide
NOTE: Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) on page 3-37.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-29
Basic Operation
Send as E-mail
Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
NOTE:
You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server. It is recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any time over a LAN. Access the COMMAND CENTER beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. For details, see COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-13.
Press the Send key. Displays the screen for sending.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to display the screen for sending.
Ready to send.
Place original. E-mail Address Entry E-mail Address Destination
Press [E-mail Addr Entry] and then [E-mail Address].
Add a new e-mail destination. Press [E-mail Address], then enter the address using the keyboard screen.
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One Touch Keys. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-35.
Add to Addr Book

Status
Next Dest.
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
3 4
Enter destination E-mail address and press [OK]. Press [Next Dest.] and repeat steps 3 to specify the destination. Up to 100 E-mail addresses can be specified.
NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed, the

destinations are registered in the Address Book.
Press [OK]. The destinations are registered in the destination list.
3-30
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Ready to send.
Place original. Destination ABCD TUVW Group1 On Hook Direct Chain abcd@efg.com 10.200.188.120 Group1 Detail/Edit Delete Recall Detail To: Auto
1/1
Destination
Check the destination list. Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check and edit it. Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove the destination from the list.
Address Book E-mail Addr Entry Folder Path Entry FAX No. Entry
0001 AAA 0006 FFF Destination

Status
0002 BBB 0007 GGG HHH Quick Setup CCC
0003 DDD 0008 III
0004 EEE 0009 JJJ
0005
No. i-FAX Addr Entry
0010
1/100
WSD Scan
Original/Sending Data Format
Color/ Image Quality
Advanced Setup
10/10/2008 10:10
Send to Folder (SMB)/Send to Folder (FTP)

Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC. Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.
NOTE:
Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder. Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.
Press the Send key. Displays the screen for sending.
Press [Folder Path Entry] and then [SMB] or [FTP].
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the Address Book or the One Touch Keys. For details, refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-35.
Ready to send.
Place original. Folder Path Entry SMB Host Name Path Login User Name Login Password Specify the folder on the destination computer. Destination
Enter host name, path, login user name and login password. Press the key of each item to first display the entry screen.
FTP
Connection Test
Add to Addr Book

Status
Next Dest.
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
OPERATION GUIDE
3-31
Basic Operation
4
Use the keyboard to enter. Limit: 126 characters Input: 0 characters Backspace ! Q A Z Upper-case @ W S X # E D C $ R F V % T G B ^ Y H N & U J M * I K < Space Cancel
Status
Enter the destination data and press [OK].
( O L >
) P : ?
_ { "
+ }
Lower-case Lower-case
No./Symbol
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Data to be entered are as follows.
NOTE: You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login password. Contact your
administrator and check your login user name or login password. For send to folder (SMB)
Item Host Name* Path
Data to be entered Host name or IP address of the PC to receive the data. Path to the receiving folder such as follows. For example, \User\ScanData. User name to access the PC For example, abcdnet\james.smith Password to access the PC
Max. characters Up to 64 characters Up to 128 characters Up to 64 characters Up to 64 characters
Login User Name Login Password

*
To specify a port number different from the default (139), enter using the format host name: port number (e.g., SMBhostname:140).
3-32
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
For send to folder (FTP)
Data to be entered Host name or IP address of FTP server Path to the receiving folder. For example, \User\ScanData. Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory. FTP server log-in user name FTP server log-in password
Max. characters Up to 64 characters Up to 128 characters

*
Up to 64 characters Up to 64 characters
To specify a port number different from the default (21), enter using the format host name: port number (e.g., FTPhostname:140).
Ready to send.
Place original. Folder Path Entry SMB Host Name Path Login User Name Login Password Specify the folder on the destination computer.
Destination
Upon completion of all entries, press [Connection Test] to check the connection.
FTP
NOTE: Connected. appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If Cannot connect. appears, review the entry.
Connection Test
To specify another destination, go to the step 6. To specify only one destination, go to step 7.
10:10
Add to Addr Book

Status
Next Dest.
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008
Press [Next Dest.] and repeat steps 3 to 5 to specify the destination. You can specify a combined total of up to 10 FTP and SMB destination folders.
NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed, the

entry is registered in the Address Book.
Press [OK] to register the entry in the destination list.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-33
Basic Operation
Ready to send.
Place original. Destination ABCD TUVW Group1 On Hook Direct Chain abcd@efg.com 10.200.188.120 Group1 Detail/Edit Delete Recall Detail To: Auto
1/1
Destination
Check the destination list. Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check and edit it. Edit it, if necessary, referring to steps 3 to 5. Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove the destination from the list.
Address Book E-mail Addr Entry Folder Path Entry FAX No. Entry
0001 AAA 0006 FFF Destination

Status
0003 DDD 0008 III
0004 EEE 0009 JJJ
0005
0010
1/100
WSD Scan
Advanced Setup
10/10/2008 10:10
NOTE: When On is selected in FTP Encrypted TX (page 5-34), keys appear for selecting the encryption method for the FTP transmission destination. Select Auto, DES, 3DES or AES as the encryption method.
3-34
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Specifying Destination
When specifying destination, choose from the Address Book or use the One Touch Keys.
NOTE: You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you press the Send key.
For details, refer to Setting the Default Send Screen on page 8-39.
3
Choosing from the Address Book
Select a destination registered in the Address Book.
Ready to send.
Place original. Destination ABCD TUVW Group1 On Hook Direct Chain abcd@efg.com 10.200.188.120 Group1 Detail/Edit Delete Recall FAX No. Entry 0001 AAA 0006 FFF Destination
Status
Destination
In the basic screen for sending, press [Address Book].
Detail To: Auto

1/1
Address Book E-mail Addr Entry Folder Path Entry
0003 DDD 0008 III
0004 EEE 0009 JJJ
0005
0010
1/100
WSD Scan
Advanced Setup
10/10/2008 10:10
Address Book Addr Book

Dest. No.
2
Address Book Sort Name
Detail Name
Type
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005

ABC DEF GHI
ABCD TUVW Group1 Group2 Group3

JKL MNO PQRS
abcd@efg.com Search(Name) tuvw@xyz.com Search(No.)

1/2
Register/Edit Address Book Detail
Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. You may choose multiple destinations. The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box. To use an address book on the LDAP server, select [Ext Address Book] from the Addr Book pull-down menu. You can change the order in which the destinations are listed by selecting [Name] or [No.] from the Sort pull-down menu.
TUV
WXYZ
0-9
E-mail
Folder
FAX
Group
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
NOTE: To cancel the selection, press the check box and remove the checkmark. For details on the external address book, refer to KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.
Press [OK] to register the selected destination in the destination list.
NOTE: To delete a destination in the list, select the

destination and press [Delete].
OPERATION GUIDE
3-35
Basic Operation
Destination Search Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched. Advanced search by type or by initial letter is also available.
Address Book Addr Book
Dest. No.
Address Book
Type Name
Sort
Name
Detail
(1) (2)
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005
ABCD TUVW Group1 Group2 Group3

GHI JKL MNO PQRS
abcd@efg.com Search(Name) tuvw@xyz.com Search(No.)

1/2
Register/Edit Address Book Detail
(3) (4)
ABC
DEF
TUV
WXYZ
0-9
E-mail
Folder
FAX
Group
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Keys used 1 2 3 4
Search type Search by name Search by address number Advanced search by initial letter Advanced search by destination
Subjects searched Search by registered name. Search by registered address number. Advanced search by initial letter of registered name. Advanced search by type of registered destination (E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX or Group). (FAX: Only when the optional fax kit is installed). You can set this function up so that destination types are selected when the address book is displayed. For more information, refer to Destination Filter Settings on page 8-77.
The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below. Search by name Press [Search(Name)] and enter the required name. Search by address number Press [Search(No.)] and enter the address number you wish to search. Advanced search by initial letter Press the key for the required initial letter. Advanced search by destination Press any of [E-mail], [Folder], [FAX] or [Group]. The destinations registered by that type are displayed.
3-36
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Choosing by One Touch Key

Ready to send.
Status
Destination
Select the destination using the One Touch Keys. In the basic screen for sending, press the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered.
Detail To: Auto

1/1
0003 DDD 0008 III
0004 EEE 0009 JJJ
0005
0010
1/100
WSD Scan
Advanced Setup
10/10/2008 10:10
NOTE: If the One Touch Keys for the desired destination is hidden on the touch panel, press [ ] or [ ] to scroll and view next or previous One Touch Keys. This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered. Refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 8-75 for more information on adding One Touch keys.
Choosing by Speed Dial

Ready to send.
Status
Destination
Access the destination by specifying the 4-digit (0001 to 1000) One Touch Key number (speed dial). In the basic screen for sending, press the Quick No. Search key or [No.] and use the numeric keys to enter the One Touch key number in the numeric entry screen.
Detail To: Auto

1/1
0003 DDD 0008 III
0004 EEE 0009 JJJ
0005
0010
1/100
WSD Scan
Advanced Setup
10/10/2008 10:10
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)

You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (optional). This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (e-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation. No. of broadcast items E-mail Folders (SMP, FTP) FAX i-FAX : Up to 100 : Total of 10 SMB and FTP : Up to 500 : Up to 100
Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time. Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one time.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-37
Basic Operation
Using Document Box

What is Document Box?
Document Box is an area in the hard disk in which you can save documents for later retrieval or sharing among multiple users. Document Box contains four types of component boxes which provide the following functions. Custom Box...page 6-2 Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval. You can create or delete a Custom Box, and manipulate data in various ways as described below: Creating a box...page 6-2 Storing Documents in a Custom Box...page 6-4 Printing a Document in a Custom Box...page 6-5 Moving / Joining Documents in a Custom Box...page 6-6 Deleting Documents in a Custom Box...page 6-9
Job Box Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options including Private Print, Stored Job, Quick Copy, Proof and Hold, and Repeat copy which will be discussed later. Three individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already provided in the Document Box. These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.
NOTE: You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted. For
details, refer to Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents on page 6-15. Private Print/Stored Job Box...page 6-10 In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job at the operation panel. When sending the job from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon completion of print job or after the main power switch is turned off. In Hold Job, access codes are not mandatory, but can be set on the printer driver if printing with PIN security is required. In this event, you need to enter the access code to print the stored jobs. Print data will be stored in the hard disk after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly. Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box...page 6-11 Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box.
3-38
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
When additional copies are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
NOTE: When you attempt to store documents in excess of the above maximum, the oldest document data will
be overwritten by the latest document data. The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the operation panel. You can change the number of copies to print. Repeat Copy Box...page 6-14 Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows to print additional copies later. By default, up to 32 documents can be stored. When power is turned off, the original data will be deleted.
NOTE: Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional Data Security Kit is installed.
Removable Memory Box A USB memory inserted into the USB memory slot (A1) of the machine is also recognizable as a Job Box. This allows printing of the PDF data stored in the USB memory. You can print PDF data directly from the USB memory without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB). Fax Box Fax Box stores the fax data received. For details, refer to the Operation Guide supplied with the fax kit.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-39
Basic Operation
Basic Operation for Document Box

This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with custom boxes.
NOTE: In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User
Logon privileges, refer to User Privileges on page 3-44. The basic procedure for using document boxes is explained below.
Press the Document Box key. The default document box screen appears.
Custom Box.
No. 0001 Name SALES Owner Anonymous Used Area ----
Press [Custom Box], [Job Box] or [Removable Memory] to select the type of document box you want to work with. In this example, press [Custom Box].
1/1
Register/Edit Box
The box list screen appears. You can use this screen for tasks such as registering and editing boxes. For more information on using the box list, refer to Custom Box List on page 3-41.
Store File Custom Box

Status
Detail
Open FAX Box

2008/10/10 10:10
Job Box
Removable Memory
NOTE: For more information on registering boxes, refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6-2.
You cannot access boxes if you forget your password. In this event, access the machine using administrator privileges and overwrite your box password.
Custom Box.
No. Name Owner Used Area
3
1 User 2 User 3 User 10% 20% 30%
1/1
Select the box containing the document you want to work with and press [Open]. The document list screen appears.
0001 0002 0003
0001 Box 0002 Box 0003 Box
Register/Edit Box
You can use this screen for tasks such as printing documents. For more information on using the document list, refer to Document List on page 3-42.

Status
Detail
Open FAX Box

10/10/2008 10:10
Job Box
Removable Memory
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,

enter the correct password.
3-40
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Custom Box List

The box list shows the registered custom boxes. The custom boxes can be listed by box number or by box name. You can manipulate the list in a range of ways, as shown below.
Listing the boxes by number in ascending/descending order.
Custom Box.
Listing the boxes by name in alphabetical order.
3
1 User 2 User 3 User 10% 20% 30%
1/1
0001 0002 0003
0001 Box 0002 Box 0003 Box
Register/Edit Box
Registers new boxes and checks, modifies or deletes box information. Opens the selected box.

Status
Detail
Open FAX Box

10/10/2008 10:10
Job Box
Removable Memory
Saves the document in the selected box.
Displays the details for the selected box.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-41
Basic Operation
Document List
The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name or as thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below. List
Listing the documents by name in alphabetical order. Selecting more than one document at a time. Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.
Box:
Listing the documents by time of update in ascending/descending order.
Listing the documents by size in ascending/descending order.
File Name 0001 0002 0003 0404200710574501 0404200710574511 0404200710574521
Date and Time 10/10/2008 09:40 10/10/2008 09:50 10/10/2008 10:00
Size 21 MB 21 MB 21 MB
1/1
Highlighting a document to display its details with [Detail].
Detail
Print
Join
Move
Delete
Store File
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Thumbnail
Selecting more than one document at a time. Highlighting a document to display its details with [Detail]. Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.
Custom Box SALES
Switches between list display and thumbnail display. Prints, joins, moves, or deletes the selected documents.
1/1
040420075501
040420075502
Detail
Print
Join
Move
Delete
Store File
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Saves the document in the open box.
NOTE: You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes.
3-42
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Viewing/Editing Box Details

You can check and modify box information. Use the procedure below.
1
Document Box/Removable Memory - Register/Edit Box
Press [Register/Edit Box] in the box list screen. Highlight the box whose details you wish to check or edit and press [Detail/Edit].
2
Used Area ----
No. 0001
Name SALES
Owner Anonymous

1/1
Add
Detail/Edit
Delete
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Box: Box No.: 0001 Box Name: SALES Box Password: ******** Usage Restriction: 21 MB Change Auto File Deletion: 30 day(s) Change Change Change Change Change
Check the box details. To edit details, press [Change] of the detail you wish to edit. Edit the detail as desired and press [OK].
Free Space: 30 GB
Overwrite Setting: Permit
Cancel
Status
Register
10/10/2008 10:10
If you have changed the details, press [Register] and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. If you did not change the details, press [No].
Press [Close]. The display returns to the default Document Box screen.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-43
Basic Operation
User Privileges
When user login administration is enabled, accessibility to the Document Box components will vary depending on the given user privilege. Accessibilities vary depending on user privilege as follows: Access level Accessibility Creating a box Operation Changing box owner Deleting a box Others Owner Changing box number Renaming a box Others Owner Others Owner Changing the password to a box Overwriting the password to a box Adjusting the box capacity Changing the owner Others Owner Others Owner Others Owner Others Owner Changing the permisson Changing the period of using a box Restricting the Accessibility to a Box The accessibility to a Custom Box differs depending on the level of privileges as follows: Administrator: An administrator can gain access and manipulate all boxes. User: A user can gain access and manipulate his/her own boxes and the shared boxes. Others Owner Others Owner
Administrator Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
User No No No Yes No No No Yes No Yes No No No No No No No Yes No Yes
Box information
NOTE: A user who is given a network authentication but not registered in the user list is limited to access the
shared boxes only.
3-44
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Password Entry Requirement When user login administration is enabled, requirement of a password differs depending on the level of privileges as follows: Administrator and Machine Administrator: The administrator is not required to enter a password to gain access to any box. User: The user is required to enter a password to gain access to a box which is protected by a password. The user is not required to enter a password to gain access to his/her own boxes.
Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled

Box: ** Box No.: 0001 Box Name: SALES Box Password: ********** Usage Restriction: 21 GB Change Change Permission: Private Auto File Deletion: 30 day(s) Change Change Change Change Change Owner: DCBA9876 Change
If you create a new Custom Box when user login administration is enabled, the screen appears and you can change the owner and permission settings. Only administrators and machine administrators can create new Custom Boxes. Press [Change] of Owner and select the new owner for the box from the displayed list. Then press [OK]. Changing the permission:Press [Change] of Permission and select either [Private] or [Shared]. Then press [OK]. Changing the owner:
Free Space: 30 GB
Cancel
Status
Register
10/10/2008 10:10
NOTE: For information on specifying other settings,

refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6-2. Working With User Privileges When User Login Administration is Enabled
Box: Box No.: 0001 Box Name: SALES Box Password: ******** Usage Restriction: 21 MB Change Permission: Private Auto File Deletion: 30 day(s) Change Change Change Change Owner: DCBA9876
When user login administration is enabled, the owner of a box with user privileges set can change the following box information: the box name, the box password, the permission, the auto file deletion and the overwrite setting.
Free Space: 30 GB
Cancel
Status
Register
10/10/2008 10:10
NOTE: It is assumed that a custom Document Box has already been created and registered.
For information on creating/registering Document Boxes, refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6-2.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-45
Basic Operation
Canceling Jobs
Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed.
Canceling Jobs
You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key. Printing jobs
Press the Stop key. Cancelling job screen appears. The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
Select the job you wish to cancel and press [Cancel]. And then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
Sending jobs
Press the Stop key. A status screen is displayed.
NOTE: Pressing the Stop key will not temporarily stop

a job that you have already started sending.
To cancel printing, select [Cancel], and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
Copying...
Job No.: 000021 Scanned Pages Job Name: Doc10102008101031 User Name: ----Printer Setting Scanner Setting
Copies
NOTE:
If Reserve Next Priority (refer to page 8-34) is set to [Off] The Copying screen appears in the touch panel during printing.
Copies
2
Letter 100% 2-sided Top Edge Top Top Tray Cancel
Status
2/ 24
Letter 2-sided Collate Plain
1
Reserve Next
10/10/2008 10:10
Press the Stop key or [Cancel]. The current print job is cancelled.
3-46
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Quick Setup Screen

In the initial screen for copying and sending (the screen which appears immediately after the Copy or Send key is first pressed after power-on), important and generally often used functions are registered from among the versatile functions of this machine. This initial screen is called Quick Setup Screen. Registration of functions in the Quick Setup Screen can be adjusted to suit your work environment for better efficiency.
Functions Available for Registration in the Quick Setup Screen

Default registrations and the functions available for registration are as follows.
Function Copying 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6:
Default Registration Paper Selection Zoom Density Duplex Combine Staple/Punch
Functions Available for Registration Paper Selection Zoom Density Duplex Combine Staple/Punch Original Orientation Collate/Offset Color Selection Original Image Original Size Continuous Scan Zoom Scan Resolution FAX TX Resolution Density 2-sided/Book Original File Format Original Size Sending Size Original Orientation Original Image Color Selection Continuous Scan
Sending
1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6:
Zoom Scan Resolution FAX TX Resolution Density 2-sided/Book Original File Format
OPERATION GUIDE
3-47
Basic Operation
Function Document Box Document Storage
Default Registration 1: Color Selection 2: Resolution 3: Density 4: 2-sided/Book Original 5: Original Orientation 6: Original Image
Functions Available for Registration Color Selection Resolution Density 2-sided/Book Original Original Orientation Original Image Original Size Zoom Continuous Scan Storing Size Paper Selection Delete after Printed Collate/Offset Duplex Staple/Punch Combine
Printing From Box
1: Paper Selection 2: Delete after Printed 3: Collate/Offset 4: Duplex 5: Staple/Punch 6: Combine
Changing Registration
Ready to copy.
Copy Image Copies
Shortcut 1
The following procedure is one example for replacing the registration of Density with Original Image in the Quick Setup Screen for copying.
Shortcut 4
Original Zoom Paper
: --: 100% : --Preview
Quick Setup
Status
Advanced Setup
10/10/2008 10:10
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Copy], [Next] of Quick Setup Registration, and then [Change] of Original Image. Press [Key 3] here as the key to set replacement location.
Copy - Paper Selection Register Paper Selection function on the Quick Setup screen.
Off Key 1 Key 4 Key 2 Key 5 Key 3 Key 6
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
3-48
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes]. The Original Image Quality function will be newly registered.
OPERATION GUIDE
3-49
Basic Operation
Using the Internet Browser

This section explains how to use the Internet browser.
NOTE: To use the Internet browser, you must specify License On for the browser in Applications (page 8-81)
and On for the browser in Internet Browser Setup (page 8-78). Launching and Exiting the Browser Use the procedure below to launch and exit the Internet browser.
Press the Application key. The application list screen appears.
Application
Press [Internet Browser]. The Internet browser starts up.
Internet Browser
Status
10/10/2008
10:10
Use the browser screen to browse web pages. For information on how to use the browser screen, refer to Using the Browser Screen on page 3-51.
To exit the browser, press [X] (Close) and then press [Yes] in the exit confirmation screen. The application list screen reappears.
NOTE: You can specify preferences such as the way the Internet browser screen is displayed. For details, refer to Internet Browser Setup (page 8-78).
3-50
OPERATION GUIDE
Basic Operation
Using the Browser Screen The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below.
Search box Pressing the text box displays a keyboard. You can then perform a search by entering a keyword and pressing the [Search]. Title bar Displays the page title.
KYOCERA MITA
Close Closes the Internet browser and returns you to the application list screen.
Scroll bars These allow you to scroll the displayed page up, down, left and right by pressing [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] or by moving one of the slide bars with your finger.
Security lock icon Displayed when you are viewing a protected page.
Enter URL Search Menu
Status
10/10/2008
10:10
Loader/Progress bar Shows the status of page loading. When the browser is loading a web page, the loader changes to an animated display.
Menu Displays the browser setup menu. You can use this menu to specify the browser's display magnification, set the text encoding scheme and check the server certificate. Search (Search Internet/Retrieval in page) Displays a search menu in which you can select [Retrieval in page] or an Internet search site. Search Internet: Use the selected search site to search with the entered keyword. Retrieval in page: Search from the entered keyword in the currently displayed page. You can continue your search by pressing [SearchUp] or [SearchDown].
Enter URL Use this display a desired web page by entering the URL for that page. Home page Displays your specified home page. You can set your home page in the Browser Preferences on page 8-78. Reload Updates the page. Back/Forward Displays the previous page or the next page.
NOTE: Pressing the Reset key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to
the application list screen without displaying the browser exit
OPERATION GUIDE
3-51
Basic Operation
3-52
OPERATION GUIDE
4 Copying Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for copying. Original Size......................................................................................... 4-2 Paper Selection.................................................................................... 4-4 Mixed Sized Originals .......................................................................... 4-8 Original Orientation ............................................................................ 4-11 Output Destination ............................................................................. 4-13 EcoPrint ............................................................................................. 4-14 Single Color Copy .............................................................................. 4-15 Color Balance Adjust ......................................................................... 4-16 Hue Adjustment ................................................................................. 4-17 One-touch Image Adjust .................................................................... 4-19 Sharpness Adjust............................................................................... 4-20 Background Density Adjust................................................................ 4-21 Combine Mode................................................................................... 4-22 Margin/Centering Mode ..................................................................... 4-25 Border Erase...................................................................................... 4-27 Booklet from Sheets........................................................................... 4-29 Cover Mode ....................................................................................... 4-32 Page Numbering ................................................................................ 4-33 Memo Mode ....................................................................................... 4-35 Poster................................................................................................. 4-37 Image Repeat/Double Copy............................................................... 4-39 Continuous Scan................................................................................ 4-41 Auto Image Rotation .......................................................................... 4-43 Negative Image.................................................................................. 4-44 Mirror Image....................................................................................... 4-45 Job Finish Notice ............................................................................... 4-46 File Name........................................................................................... 4-48 Priority Override ................................................................................. 4-49 Repeat Copy ...................................................................................... 4-50 OHP Backing Sheet Mode ................................................................. 4-52 Program (Copying and Sending) ....................................................... 4-54 Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) .... 4-56
OPERATION GUIDE
4-1
Copying Functions
Original Size
Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to specify the original size when copying non-standard sizes. The following options are available. Item Standard Sizes 1 How to Select Have the size of original detected automatically, or select from the standard sizes. Sizes Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement, Statement-R, 8.513.5", Oficio II and 1115" Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R and Folio Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K and 16K-R Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement, Statement-R, 8.513.5", Oficio II, 1115", 8K, 16K and 16K-R Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Custom 1 to 4
Standard Sizes 2
Select from the standard sizes not included in the Standard Sizes 1 .
Others
Select from envelope, postcard or the custom sized originals*. Enter the size not included in the standard sizes 1 and 2**.
Size Entry
Inch models Horizontal: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Vertical: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments) Metric models Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments), Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
**
For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-5. The input units can be changed in the System menu. Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-16.
Use the procedure below to select the original size.
1 2
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen.
4-2
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
3
Ready to copy.
Original Size Standard Sizes 1 Place original. Standard Sizes 2 Others OficioII Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original Size]. Press [Standard Sizes 1 ], [Standard Sizes 2 ], [Others] or [Size Entry] to select the original size.
Copies
Auto Letter Statement
Ledger Legal 11x15"
Letter Statement 8.5x13.5"
Size Entry
4
Cancel OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Ready to copy.
Original Size Standard Sizes 1 Place original. Standard Sizes 2 Others Y Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Copies
(2.00 - 17.00) "
17
If [Size Entry] is selected, press [+] or [-] to specify the horizontal size (X) and the vertical size (Y). Press [# Keys] to enter the size directly using the numeric keys.
# Keys (2.00 - 11.69) "
Size Entry
11
# Keys Cancel OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
Press [OK]. Press the Start key to start copying.
OPERATION GUIDE
4-3
Copying Functions
Paper Selection
Select the paper source that contains the required paper size.
NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper
Settings on page 8-5).
Selecting the Cassette

Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Paper Selection Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper Selection]. Press the key of the paper source corresponding to the required paper size. The cassette in which the paper is loaded is selected. If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.
Place original.
Auto Letter Plain Ledger Plain Letter Plain MP Tray Setting
Original Zoom Paper
Letter Plain Letter Plain Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
4-4
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray

Change the paper size and media type. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. How to Select Choose from the standard size.
Category Paper Size
Item Standard Sizes 1
Sizes Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement, 8.513.5", Oficio II and Executive Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R and Folio
Standard Sizes 2
Choose from the standard sizes not included in the Standard Sizes 1.
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K and 16K-R Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement, 8.513.5", Oficio II, Executive, 8K, 16K and 16K-R ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 and Custom 1 to 4* Inch models Horizontal: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Vertical: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments) Metric models Vertical: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments), Horizontal: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Others
Choose from nonstandard sizes and custom sizes.
Size Entry
Enter the size not included in the standard sizes 1 and 2**.
Media Type
Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted***, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***, Thick (106 g/m2 or more), Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8***
OPERATION GUIDE
4-5
Copying Functions
** ***
For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-6. The input units can be changed in the System menu. Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-16. For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-11. To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-15.
NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them
as default (refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8-9). Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Paper Selection - MP Tray Setting Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others Ledger Legal 8.5x13.5" Letter Statement OficioII Letter Executive Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing], [Paper Selection] and then [MP Tray Setting]. Press [Standard Sizes 1 ], [Standard Sizes 2 ], [Others] or [Size Entry] to select the paper size.
Size Entry Plain Media Type
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Ready to copy.
Original Size Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others Y Size Entry # Keys (3.86 - 11.69) " X (5.83 - 17.00) "
Copies
17
If you select [Size Entry], press [+] or [] to specify X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. You can enter the size directly using the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].
11
Plain Media Type # Keys Cancel

Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6 7
Press [Media Type]. Press [Media Type] to select paper type, and press [OK]. Press [OK].
4-6
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
8 9
Press [OK]. Press the Start key to start scanning the originals. screen for the specified paper appears. Load the required paper in the multi purpose tray and press [Continue] to start copying.
10 When the machine is ready, the confirmation
OPERATION GUIDE
4-7
Copying Functions
Mixed Sized Originals

Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can be loaded in a batch and copied. In this operation, up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time.
Supported Combinations of Originals

Originals of the Same Width The supported combinations of originals are as follows. Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)
Ledger
Letter
Letter
Ledger
Ledger and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)
Legal
Letter-R
Letter-R Legal
B4 and B5
4-8
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Originals of Different Widths Place all originals of different widths. The supported combinations of originals are as follows.
NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: Folio, A4-R, and B5-R, make sure to set the System Menu key -> [Common Settings] -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On] for [Folio]. For more information, refer to Automatic Detection of Originals (Available for metric models only) on page 8-13.
A3, B4, A4 and B5
B4, A4-R and B5
Folio, A4-R and B5-R
OPERATION GUIDE
4-9
Copying Functions
Selecting How to Copy Originals

Select whether you wish to create individual copies on different size papers matching the original sizes or to produce all copies on the same size papers.
NOTE: This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.
The table below shows the finished document sizes for the different original size options. Option Mixed Size Copies Same Size Copies Description Originals are detected individually for size and copied to the same size papers as originals. Originals are all copied to the same size papers.
Use the procedure below to copy mixed size originals.
1 2
Press the Copy key. Place originals on the document processor.
IMPORTANT: When placing originals of different widths, be sure to flush them against the document width guide toward the back of the machine.
3
Ready to copy.
Mixed Size Originals Off Original Width Copies
Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Mixed Size Originals]. Select [Mixed Size Copies] or [Same Size Copies] as finish size.
Place original.
Mixed Size Copies Same Size Copies
Same Width
Different Width
Top Page Direction
Original Zoom Paper
Long Edge Left
Short Edge Left
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
Select the combination of originals from [Same Width] and [Different Width]. When [Same Size Copies] is selected, select [Long Edge Left] or [Short Edge Left] as the first original orientation. Press [OK]. Press the Start key to start copying.
6 7
4-10
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Original Orientation
Select the original orientation to use the following functions. * Zoom (XY Zoom) Duplex Margin/Centering originals Border erase Combine mode Memo mode Page numbering Booklets Stapling/Punch (optional feature) If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation on page 8-19 setting in the System Menu, the selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions.
When placing originals on the platen
Original
[Top Edge Top]
[Top Edge Left]
When placing originals on the optional document processor
Original
[Top Edge Top]
[Top Edge Left]
NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to Original Orientation on page 8-20.
OPERATION GUIDE
4-11
Copying Functions
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document's top edge. Place original. Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original Orientation]. Select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left] as the way the original is oriented.
Original Zoom Paper
Top Edge Top
Top Edge Left
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
4-12
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Output Destination
You can use the procedure below to select an output destination such as the optional document finisher for your copies.
NOTE: Optional output destinations include the job separator, document finisher, 3,000 sheet document
finisher and mailbox. The table below shows the available output destinations. Destination Top tray Finisher Tray* TrayA,TrayB*,TrayC* Job Separator Tray Tray1 to 7*
*
4
Description
Top tray of the machine (where copies are stored) Tray of the optional document finisher Trays A to C in the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher Optional job separator Trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox (tray 1 is the top tray)
Copy output orientation can be selected either as face-up (print facing up) or face-down (print facing down).
NOTE: To change default destination for copies, refer to Paper Output on page 8-18 for details.
Use the procedure below to select the output destination.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Paper Output Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper Output]. Select the output destination for finished copies. When you select [Finisher Tray], [TrayB], [TrayC] or [Tray1] to [Tray7], select the orientation of output copy, Face Up (print facing up) or Face Down (print facing down).
Face Up Place original. Face Down
Top Tray Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Tray A Tray 1 Tray 5
Tray B Tray 2 Tray 6
Tray C Tray 3 Tray 7
Job Separator Tray Tray 4
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
OPERATION GUIDE
4-13
Copying Functions
EcoPrint
Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary. The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
EcoPrint Conserve toner when printing. Use EcoPrint for test copies and other situations where high-quality copies are not necessary. Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [EcoPrint]. Press [On].
Place original.
Original Zoom Paper
Off
On
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
4-14
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Single Color Copy

Specify one of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Green, or Blue, and produce copies with that color regardless of original type. Follow the steps as below for Single Color Copy.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Color Selection Auto Color Single Color Copies
Press Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Color/Image Quality], [Color Selection] and then press [Single Color]. Select color for copying from [Cyan], [Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green] or [Blue].
4
1
Place original.
Full Color Cyan Black & White Magenta Yellow
Original Zoom Paper
Single Color
Red
Green
Blue
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
OPERATION GUIDE
4-15
Copying Functions
Color Balance Adjust

Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments.
NOTE: This feature is used with full color copying. This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density (see page 3-13). This feature can not be used together with One touch Image Adjust (see page 4-19). Refer to the sample image in Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality.
Follow the steps below to adjust color balance.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Color Balance Off Cyan Place original. On Magenta -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Copies
Press Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Color Balance]. Press [On].
Yellow Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut

Status
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0
Black
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [ ] or [ ] on each side of the color to be adjusted (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) to adjust each color. Press [OK]. Press the Start key. Copying begins.
6 7
4-16
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Hue Adjustment
Adjust the color (hue) of images. Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow-red or yellow to a strong green-yellow to make more creative copies. The items that may be configured are as follows. Yellow Red Magenta Blue Green Cyan All: Adjust hue for all colors. Yellow - Green & Blue - Magenta: Adjust color balance for yellow and green, and blue and magenta. Green - Cyan & Magenta - Red: Adjust color balance for green and cyan, and magenta and red. Cyan - Blue & Red - Yellow: Adjust color balance for cyan and blue, and red and yellow.
NOTE: This feature is used with full color copying. This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density (see page 3-13). This feature can not be used together with One touch Image Adjust mode (see page 4-19). These adjustments are especially useful on rich color images.
Follow the steps below to use image hue adjustment.
1 2 3 4
Ready to copy.
Hue Adjustment Off Adjust hue for all colors. Copies
Press Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Hue Adjustment]. Select the item for which the hue is to be adjusted and then press [ ] or [ ] to make the adjustment.
Place original.
All Red
Yellow Green
Yellow - Green & Blue - Magenta Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Green - Cyan & Magenta - Red Cyan - Blue & Red - Yellow
Magenta Blue
Cyan
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
OPERATION GUIDE
4-17
Copying Functions
Yellow Red Magenta Blue Green Cyan
Example 1 Select [Yellow - Green & Blue - Magenta], and press [ ] to adjust yellow closer to green, and blue closer to magenta.
Yellow Red Magenta Blue Green Cyan
Example 2 Select [Cyan - Blue & Red - Yellow], and press [ ] to adjust yellow closer to red , and blue closer to cyan.
5 6
4-18
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
One-touch Image Adjust

Adjust images as desired to more vivid or more dull images. The items that may be configured are as follows: Vivid, Dull, Sharp, Smooth, Light, Dark Refer to the sample image in Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality for examples of the effect of each setting.
NOTE: This feature is used with full color copying. This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density (see page 3-13). This feature can not be used together with Color Balance Adjust (see page 4-16). Select from one of the 6 available One Touch Image Adjust types. Multiple selections are not possible.
Follow the steps below to use One-touch Image Adjust.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
One-touch Image Adjust Adjust images as desired. Copies
Press Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Onetouch Image Adjust]. Select the image.
Place original.
Off Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut

Status
Vivid Smooth
Dull Light
Sharp Dark
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
OPERATION GUIDE
4-19
Copying Functions
Sharpness Adjust
Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine phots, in which moire patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen]. Refer to the sample image in Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality. Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Sharpness Copies
Press Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Color/Image Quality] and then Press [Sharpness]. Press [-3] to [3] (Unsharpen - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
Place original. Unsharpen Sharpen

Status
-2
-1
+1
+2
+3
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
4-20
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Background Density Adjust

Lightens the background of color originals with dark backgrounds.
Original
Copy
NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto color copying. Background Density Adjust is disabled during auto color copying when the a black & white original has been detected.
Follow the steps below to use background density adjust.
4
Press Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Background Density Adj.]. Press [On].
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Background Density Adj. Off Background Lighter Place original. On 1 2 3 4 5 Darker Copies
Original Zoom Paper
: --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6 7
Press [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background color intensity. Press [OK]. Press the Start key. Copying begins.
OPERATION GUIDE
4-21
Copying Functions
Combine Mode
This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The page boundary of each original can be indicated.
NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3, B4, Folio, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.513.5", Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.
2-in-1 Mode
For copying two originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals onto one sheet. The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available.
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
4-22
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
4-in-1 Mode
For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet. The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available.
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
Types of Page Boundary Lines

The following types of the boundary lines are available.
None
Solid
Dotted
Borders (Cropmark)
The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below.
1 2
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen.
OPERATION GUIDE
4-23
Copying Functions
3
Ready to copy.
Combine Off Layout Copies
Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Combine]. Press [2 in 1] or [4 in 1], and choose the page layout of Layout.
Place original.
2 in 1 Right then Down 4 in 1 Border Line Left then Down None
Original Zoom Paper
Top Edge Top Down then Right Down then Left Original Orientation
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
Press [Border Line] to choose the type of the lines to indicate page boundaries. Press [OK]. Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK]. Press [OK]. Press the Start key. Copying begins. If the original is placed on the platen, replace the original and press the Start key. After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to start copying.
7 8
4-24
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Margin/Centering Mode
Shift the original image to make space on the copy for binding on the left (right) or top (bottom) side. When you copy onto paper different from the original size, you can center the original image on the paper. The following margin widths are available. Input units Inch Models Metric Models Margin Width -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments) -18 mm to 18 mm (in 1-mm increments)
Margin on the Back Side

When duplex copying, you can also specify the margin on the back side. Auto When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin specified for the front page and a binding orientation. Separate Front/Back Margins Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately.
NOTE: You can set the default margin width. Refer to Margin Default on page 8-27 for details.
Use the procedure below to make copies with margins.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Margin/Centering Off Left/Right (-18 - +18) Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Margin/Centering]. Press [Margin] to select the copy with margin. Use [+] or [] to enter the margins for Left/Right and Top/Bottom. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
0
Place original. Margin # Keys Top/Bottom Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
"
Auto Back Page
Centering
(-0.75 - +0.75) "
For duplex copying, press [Back Page] and select [Auto] or [Manual].
# Keys Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
OPERATION GUIDE
4-25
Copying Functions
Ready to copy.
Margin/Centering - Back Page Auto Left/Right (-0.75 - +0.75) "
Copies
If you selected [Auto], press [OK]. If you pressed [Manual], enter the margins in the displayed screen and then press [OK].
0.25
Place original.
Manual # Keys Top/Bottom (-0.75 - +0.75) "
Original Zoom Paper
0.25
# Keys Cancel OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
Ready to copy.
Margin/Centering Off
Copies
Press [Centering] to center the original image on the paper.
Place original.
Margin
Centering
Original Zoom Paper
: --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK]. Press [OK]. Press the Start key to start copying.
6 7
4-26
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Border Erase
Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when making copies. The following options can be selected.
Border Erase Sheet

Erases black borders around the single sheet original.
4
Original Copy
Border Erase Book

Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick book. You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book.
Original Copy
Individual Border Erase

Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.
Original
Copy
In each option, the available ranges are as below. Input units Inch Models Metric Models Border Erase Range 0 to 2"(in 0.01" increments) 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)
NOTE: To specify the default width value of Border Erase, refer to Border Erase Default on page 8-27 for
details.
OPERATION GUIDE
4-27
Copying Functions
Border Erase to Back Page

When scanning a 2-sided original, this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original. The table below shows the available settings. Item Same as Front Page Do Not Erase Detail Border Erase performed using the same setting as the front page No Border Erase performed on the back page
NOTE: You can change the default setting for Border Erase to Back Page. For details, refer to Border Erase
for Back Page on page 8-32. Use the procedure below to erase borders when copying.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Border Erase Off Border (-0.75 - +0.75) " Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Border Erase]. Select [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase borders for a book. Use [+] or [] to enter the width in Border or Gutter. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
0.25
Place original.
Border Erase Sheet Border Erase Book # Keys Gutter (-0.75 - +0.75) " Same as Front Page Back Page
Original Zoom Paper
: --: 100% : ---
0.25
Preview Add Shortcut

Status
# Keys Cancel OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Ready to copy.
Border Erase Off Top Place original. Border Erase Sheet Border Erase Book Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Copies
Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the individual border erase. Use [+] or [] to enter the width in Top, Bottom, Left or Right. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry. Press [Original Orientation] to select the original orientation from either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK].
10:10
(0.00 - 2.00)
0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
" " " " Top Edge Top Original Orientation Same as Front Page Back Page
Bottom Left Right
# Keys Cancel
OK
10/10/2008
For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and then press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
5 6
4-28
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Booklet from Sheets

The Booklet copying option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures or pamphlets. A booklet, such as a magazine, is made by folding at the center. You can copy the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 8-14.
NOTE: Using the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your copies (fold them in two with staples in the center seam). This is limited to the A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R.
The supported original and paper sizes are as follows. Type of Original One-sided original, Two-sided original Original Size All* Paper Size A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter and Letter-R A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal and Letter-R A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, Letter and Letter-R A4-R and Letter-R
All*
Book original
A3, B4, A4-R, B5R, A5-R, Ledger, Letter-R and 8K A3, B4, A4-R, B5R, A5-R, Ledger and Letter-R
Except for custom sized originals.
For binding on the left side

The folded copies can be read from left to right.
Original
Copy
OPERATION GUIDE
4-29
Copying Functions
For binding on the right side

The folded copies can be read from right to left.
Original
Copy
For top binding

The folded copies can be read from top to bottom.
Original
Copy
The procedure for using Booklet copying is explained below.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Booklet Off Original Binding Left/Right Place original. 1-sided >>Booklet 2-sided >>Booklet Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Booklet]. Press [1-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet from single-sided originals. Press [2-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet from two-sided originals. Press [Book>>Booklet] to produce a booklet from an open book original.
Copies
Off Cover
Binding Top Off Finishing Binding Left Binding Right Binding Top Cancel Saddle Stitch Top Edge Top Original Orientation
Book >>Booklet
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
If you selected [2-sided>>Booklet] or [Book>>Booklet], choose the binding orientation in Finishing. If you selected [1-sided>>Booklet], choose the binding orientation in Finishing.
If you choose [1-sided>>Booklet], [2-sided>>Booklet], or [Book>>Booklet] you can add the cover. Press [Cover], select [Cover] and press [OK].
4-30
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Then press [OK]. If the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher and folding unit are installed, the [Saddle Stitch] option is displayed. To use saddle stitching, press [Saddle Stitch] and then press [Bind and Fold]. You can saddle stitch up to 16 sheets (64 pages). Press [OK].
10 Platen and press the Start key. Copying begins.

NOTE: When using the platen, be sure to place the
originals in page order. If the originals are placed on the platen, consecutively replace each original after pressing the Start key. After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to start copying.
OPERATION GUIDE
4-31
Copying Functions
Cover Mode
Add a cover to the finished copies. You can copy the first page and/or the last page onto colored paper or thick paper fed from the different paper source than the regular one. The following two options are available. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 8-14. Type of Cover Front Cover Front and Back Covers Description First page of the originals is copied on a different paper. First page and last page of the originals are copied on different paper.
The procedure for using Cover mode copying is explained below.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Cover Print cover pages on the different type of paper, using a different paper source. Select either [Front Cover] or [Front and Back Covers]. *Set paper source for cover in System Menu. Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Cover]. Press [Front Cover] or [Front and Back Covers].
Place original.
Original Zoom Paper
None
Front Cover
Front and Back Covers
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
Press [OK]. Press the Start key. Copying begins. If the originals are placed on the platen, consecutively replace each original after pressing the Start key. After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to start copying.
4-32
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Page Numbering
Number multiple pages of originals in sequential order. The formats for numbering are [-1-], [P.1] or [1/n]. The format [1/n] prints the total number of pages in the place of n. Select Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Middle or Bottom Right as the page numbering position.
Original
[ 1 ]
[P.1]
[1/n]
Use the procedure below to insert page numbers on your copies.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Page # None Position Top Left Bottom Left P.1 1st Page 1/n (1 - 10) Start # (1 - 999) Denominator # Top Edge Top Original Orientation Top Middle Bottom Middle Top Right Bottom Right Auto Last Page Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Page #]. Select the numbering format from [-1-], [P.1] or [1/n].
-1-
Auto
# Keys
# Keys Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
Select the page numbering position. To start page numbering from a page other than the first page, press [+] or [] of 1st Page and select the starting page. You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys]. To start the numbering with a number other than 1, press [+] or [] of Start Number and enter the starting number. You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].
OPERATION GUIDE
4-33
Copying Functions
If you do not want page numbering through to the last page, press [Last Page]. Select Manual and use [+] or [-] to enter the final page to be numbered (a negative number of pages counting backwards from the last page). Then press [OK]. You can set a value up to -10. You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys]. The total number of pages n in the format [1/n] can be changed manually. Press [Denominator #] and select [Manual]. Press [+] or [] to enter the total number of pages and press [OK]. You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys]. the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Press [OK].
10 Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
11 Press [OK]. 12 Press the Start key to start copying.
4-34
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Memo Mode
Delivers copies with a space for adding notes. You can also copy two originals onto the same sheet with a space or add lines to indicate page boundaries.
NOTE: Memo mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.513.5", Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, A3, B4, Folio, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.
Layout A
Reduces images of each original page for printing onto half of a page, leaving the other half blank for notes.
Original
Copy
Layout B
Reduces images of two original pages for copying onto half of a single page, leaving the other half blank for notes.
Original
Copy
OPERATION GUIDE
4-35
Copying Functions
Types of Page Boundary Lines

The following boundary lines are available.
None
Solid
Dotted
Borders (Cropmark)
Use the procedure below to insert page boundary lines on your copies.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Memo Page Off Layout Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Memo Page]. Press [Layout A] or [Layout B]. Select the page layout from Layout.
Place original.
Layout A Top L to R Layout B Border Line Top R to L None
Original Zoom Paper
Top Edge Top Top L to B Top R to B Original Orientation
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
Press [Border Line] to select the page boundary line. Press [OK]. Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left]. Press [OK]. Press [OK]. Press the Start key to start copying.
7 8
4-36
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Poster
For using this device to make copies larger than the maximum paper size, use Poster mode to separate and copy an enlarged image onto multiple pages. The completed copies have overlapping areas. A single large page can be created by pasting those areas together. Original Copy Choose from one of the following 3 enlargement settings. Copy size The output paper size is chosen from the following sizes. Copy is enlarged according to the selected paper size. Model Type Inch models Metric models Paper size 34 44", 22 34", 17 22" A0, A1, A2
Zoom prioirty Specify the output zoom size from 100 to 400%. Image will be output on the necessary number of copies for the specified zoom size. Number of sheets Select number of sheets to split the image from 2, 4, or 8 sheets. Copy is enlarged according to the selected number of pages.
NOTE: The available original sizes are 11 17", 8 1/2 11", A3 and A4R. The available paper sizes are 11 17" and A3 only.
Follow the steps as below to use poster enlargement.
1 2 3
Press Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Poster].
OPERATION GUIDE
4-37
Copying Functions
Ready to copy.
Poster Off
Copies
Select enlargement method. If [Copy Size] is selected, set the output paper size.
Separate and copy an image suitable for the selected copy size. Copy Size
Place original.
If [Zoom Priority] is selected, set the output zoom size. If [Number of Sheets] is selected, set the number of split pages.
Zoom Priority Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Number of Sheets 34x44" 22x34" 17x22"
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
4-38
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Image Repeat/Double Copy

Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image. You can also specify the area of the original to repeat.
Image Repeat Copies the original image multiple times onto 1 sheet at a specified magnification. You can also specify how much of the original is repeatedly copied.
Original Double Copy
Copy
Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet. For example, you can double-copy an A4 original onto an A3 sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies that are identical to the original.
Original
Copy
Follow the steps as below to use Image Repeat/Double Copy.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Image Repeat Off (25 - 400) Copies
Press Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Image Repeat]. Press [Zoom Priority]. To make double copies, press [Double Copy] and proceed to step 8.
4
1
100
Place original. Zoom Priority Double Copy Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
# Keys
Off Specify Repeat Area
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [+] or [] to set the zoom size. Press [# Keys] to enter with numeric keys.
To set the area of the original to be repeated, press [On] for Specify Repeat Area.
OPERATION GUIDE
4-39
Copying Functions
Press [+] or [] to input the area of the original to be repeated. With metric models, you can enter the border width directly using the numeric keys afer pressing [#Keys]. Y1: Length from top left of platen to top edge of repeat area X1: Length from Height from top left of platen to left edge of repeat area Y2: Height of repeat area X2: Width of repeat area
8 9
4-40
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Continuous Scan
When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until you press [Scan Finish]. Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning. Original size selection Original orientation Image quality selection Type of original (2-sided/book original) Zoom Border erase Density Color Selection
If you use Job Build, you can insert a blank paper during scanning or a blank page during duplex copying. The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below.
1 2
Ready to copy.
Continuous Scan Off Select desired binding orientation. Copies
Press the Copy key. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous Scan]. If Continuous Scan is selected, press [On]. If Job Build is selected, press [Job Build] and select desired binding orientation.
Place original.
On
Job Build
Original Zoom Paper
Binding Left
Binding Right
Binding Top
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
4
Scan next original(s). Place the originals and press Start key. Press [Finish Scan] to start copying. Job No.: 000021 Scanner Setting Job Name: doc20080505113414 Copies
Press [OK]. Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen and press the Start key. If [Job Build] is selected, the next page can be changed. Press [Sheet Insertion] to insert a blank paper. Press [Next Copy: On Back] in duplex copying to print the next page on back page.
1
User Name: ----Finishing pages
Original Size
Original Image
Next Copy: On Front
2-sided/Book Original
Zoom
Border Erase Next Copy: On Back Sheet Insertion
Density
1/2 Cancel
Finish Scan
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
OPERATION GUIDE
4-41
Copying Functions
Place the next original and press the Start key. Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals. After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to start copying.
4-42
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Auto Image Rotation

Automatically rotates the image when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the orientations are different. The images will be rotated 90 counter-clockwise prior to copying.
NOTE: To set Auto Image Rotation as the default mode, refer to Auto Image Rotation on page 8-28.
The procedure for making copies using Auto Image Rotation is explained below.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Auto Image Rotation]. Press [On] to select Auto Image Rotation. Press [OK]. Press the Start key to start copying.
OPERATION GUIDE
4-43
Copying Functions
Negative Image
Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing.
NOTE: This function is only available for black and white copy mode.
Use the procedure below to make negative image copies.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Negative Image]. Press [On] to select Negative Image. Press [OK]. Press the Start key to start copying.
4-44
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Mirror Image
Copies the mirrored image of the original.
NOTE: This function is only available for black and white copy mode.
Use the procedure below to make mirror image copies.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Mirror Image]. Press [On] to select Mirror Image. Press [OK]. Press the Start key to start copying.
OPERATION GUIDE
4-45
Copying Functions
Job Finish Notice

Sends a notice by E-mail when a copy job is complete. User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish.
NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.

Example of Job Finish Notice
To: Subject:
h_pttr@owl-net.net 1234 Job end report mail
Job No.: Result: End Time: File Name: Job Type: 1234
000002 OK Wed 27 Apr 2005 14:56:08 doc27042005145608 Copy
-----------------------------------------------[00:c0:ee:d0:01:14] ------------------------------------------------
Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Job Finish Notice Off Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish Notice]. To select the address to be notified from the address book, press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and then press [Address Book] in the next screen. Press [Address Book], select desired E-mail address and press [OK]. Press [Detail] to view the data of the selected destination.
Address Book User A Address Entry
Destination abc@def.com
Detail
Detail
Address Book
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
4-46
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Ready to copy.
Job Finish Notice Off E-mail Address
Copies
To directly enter the E-mail address, press [Address Entry]. Press [E-mail Address], enter the address and press [OK].
Address Book
Address Entry
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
4
5 6
Press [OK]. Press the Start key to start copying. Upon completion of the job, an E-mail notice is sent to the selected destination.
OPERATION GUIDE
4-47
Copying Functions
File Name
Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. You can check a job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified here. Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
File Name Entry Add a file name. Additional information such as Job No. and Date and Time can also be set. File Name doc Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name Entry]. Press [File Name], enter the name for a copy job, and press [OK]. To add date and time, press [Date and Time]. To add job number, [Job No.]. Added information is displayed in Additional Info.
Additional Info Job No. Job No. Date and Time
NOTE: The maximum length of the file name is

32 characters.
Cancel OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Add Shortcut
Status
5 6
4-48
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Priority Override
Suspends a current job and gives the selected job priority for copying. The suspended job resumes after Priority Override copying is finished.
NOTE: The current job that is selected as Priority Override cannot be suspended.
The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Priority Override]. Press [On] to select Priority Override. Press [OK]. Press the Start key. The current copy job is suspended and the copy job selected in Priority Override starts. The suspended job resumes after Priority Override copying is finished.
OPERATION GUIDE
4-49
Copying Functions
Repeat Copy
Enable additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed. For confidential documents, you can set up a pass code for the use of Repeat Copy. In such a case, the correct pass code must be entered when using Repeat Copy or copies will not be delivered. IMPORTANT: A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the main power switch is turned off. Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the optional Data Security Kit. Repeat Copy cannot be used when the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is set to zero (refer to Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained on page 4-51). You can select Repeat Copy as default setting. Refer to Repeat Copying on page 8-31. Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying (refer to File Name on page 4-48).
Selecting Repeat Copy

Use the procedure below to select repeat copying.
1 2 3
Ready to copy.
Repeat Copy Off Password(4digits) Place original. On # Keys Copies
Press the Copy key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Repeat Copy]. Press [On]. To register a password, press [# Keys] and enter a 4-digit password.
Original Zoom Paper

10/10/2008 10:10
IMPORTANT: If you forget the pass code, Repeat Copy will be unavailable. Make a note of the pass code beforehand if necessary.
Status
5 6
Press [OK]. Press the Start key to start copying and register this job as a Repeat Copy job.
4-50
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs

The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Document Box. Refer to Job Box on page 3-38 to print out the Repeat Copy jobs.
Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained

You can use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs that can be retained in the document box. Use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs retained.
1 2 3
Document Box/Removable Memory - Repeat Copy Job Retention Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain. Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number. *Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.
Press the System Menu key. Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and then [Next] of Job Box. Press [Change] of Repeat Copy Job Retention. Use the [+] or [-] key to enter the maximum retention number. You can also enter the number from the number keypad.
(0 - 50)
32
job(s)
A number between 0 and 50 can be entered as the number of retained jobs.
NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use

Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
the Repeat Copy function.
Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
4-51
Copying Functions
OHP Backing Sheet Mode

When two or three OHP transparencies are stacked on top of each other, static electricity may make them difficult to handle. When using OHP Backing mode, a paper sheet is automatically inserted between each transparency, making them easier to handle. Also, the same original page can be copied to the backing sheet for multiple page copying.
NOTE: Never load OHP transparencies into trays or cassettes other than the multi purpose tray. When OHP Backing mode is set, the multi purpose tray paper type is automatically set to Transparency. If the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher is installed, you may need to specify the output destination for finished copies. For further details, refer to Output Destination on page 4-13.
Blank Sheet
Outputs a blank backing sheet after copying to a transparency. (* denotes OHP film.)
1* 1 2 3 2
*
3*
Original
Copy
Copied Sheet
1* 1 2 3
1 2
After copying to a transparency, copies the same original image to the backing sheet paper. (* denotes OHP film.)
*2
3
*3
Original
Copy
Follow the steps below for OHP Backing Sheet mode.
1 2 3
Press Copy key. Place the original. Load the transparencies into the multi purpose tray.
IMPORTANT: Fan through the transparencies before loading. Up to 10 transparencies can be loaded at one time. Be sure that paper of the same size and orientation as the transparencies is loaded in the cassette.
4-52
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
4
Ready to copy.
OHP Backing Sheet Off Select the paper source to feed paper. Copies
Press [Advanced Setup] and then Press [OHP Backing Sheet]. Press [Blank Sheet] or [Copied Sheet].
Place original.
Blank Sheet Auto Copied Sheet Letter Plain Ledger Plain
Original Zoom Paper
Letter Plain Letter Plain OK

10/10/2008 10:10
4
6
Select the media to be fed. If you press [Auto], the machine automatically selects media that matches the size of the original. Press [OK]. Press the Start key. Copying begins.
Status
7 8
OPERATION GUIDE
4-53
Copying Functions
Program (Copying and Sending)

After registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply press the program number as needed to recall those functions. You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling.
NOTE: Sending operation can be registered in the program as well. Up to 10 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the program.
If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.
Registering Programs
Use the procedure below to register a program. The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.
1 2
Press the Program key while the copy mode is accessed. Press [Register] and press a number (01 to 10) for the program number. If entering Program screen from the Copy screen or Send screen, go to step 4.
NOTE: If you select a program number already registered, the currently registered functions can be replaced with a new set of functions.
3 4 Recalling Programs
Use the procedure below to recall a registered program.
Check that [Copy] is selected, and press [Next]. Enter the new program name and press [Register] to register the program.
1
Program recalling.
01 FAX 1 06
Press the Program key. Press [Recall] and press the key corresponding to the program number (01 to 10) to recall. Press the Quick No. Search key to enter the program number directly for recalling.
02 FAX 2
07
03
08
04
09
05
10
NOTE: If the program cannot be recalled, the Document Box specified in the program might have been deleted. Check the Document Box.
Recall
Status
Register
Edit
10/10/2008 10:10
4-54
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Place the originals and press the Start key. Copying is performed according to the registered program.
Editing and Deleting Programs

You can change program number and program name, or delete program. Use the procedure below to edit or delete a program.
1 2 3
Press the Program key. Press [Edit] and press the key(s) corresponding to the program number (01 to 10) to change or delete. To edit a program, use the procedure for registering a program and press [Change]. Then change the program number and program name and press [Register]. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to change the program. To delete the program, press [Delete this Program]. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to finally delete the program.
OPERATION GUIDE
4-55
Copying Functions
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)

Add shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions. A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary. You can register up to 6 shortcuts for copying functions, sending functions, and functions set for document box.
Adding Shortcuts
Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function. Shortcuts can be registered for all functions in which [Add Shortcut] appears on the screen. Use the procedure below to register a shortcut.
Ready to copy.
Memo Page Off Layout Copies
After making the desired settings in the setup screen of each function, press [Add Shortcut].
Place original.
Layout A Top L to R Layout B Border Line Top R to L None
Original Zoom Paper
Top Edge Top Top L to B Top R to B Original Orientation
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
Press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number (01 to 06) to register.
NOTE: If you select a shortcut number already registered, the currently registered shortcut can be replaced with a new one.
Enter the shortcut name and press [Register] to add the shortcut.
4-56
OPERATION GUIDE
Copying Functions
Editing and Deleting Shortcuts

Follow the steps as below to change shortcut number/name or delete shortcut.
1 2 3
In the setup screen of each function, press [Add Shortcut] in the bottom of the screen. Press [Edit] and press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number (01 to 06) to change or delete. To edit a shortcut, press [Change] to change the shortcut button number and name and press [OK] and then [Register]. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to change the shortcut. To delete the shortcut, press [Delete this Shortcut]. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to delete the shortcut.
OPERATION GUIDE
4-57
Copying Functions
4-58
OPERATION GUIDE
5 Sending Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals. Original Size Selection..................................................5-2 Sending Size Selection .................................................5-4 Zoom.............................................................................5-6 Centering ......................................................................5-7 Mixed Sized Originals ...................................................5-8 1-sided/2-sided Selection............................................ 5-11 Original Orientation .....................................................5-12 File Format..................................................................5-14 PDF Encryption Functions ..........................................5-16 Image Quality..............................................................5-19 Adjusting Density ........................................................5-20 Scan Resolution..........................................................5-21 Sharpness...................................................................5-22 Background Density Adjustment.................................5-23 Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection ...........5-24 Continuous Scan.........................................................5-25 Border Erase...............................................................5-26 Enter Document Name/File Name ..............................5-28 Enter E-mail Subject and Body ...................................5-29 WSD Scan ..................................................................5-30 Job Finish Notice ........................................................5-31 Send and Print ............................................................5-32 Send and Store ...........................................................5-33 FTP Encrypted TX ......................................................5-34 Color Type...................................................................5-35 About Color Profiles ....................................................5-35
OPERATION GUIDE
5-1
Sending Functions
Original Size Selection

Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size when using originals of nonstandard sizes. Choose the original size from the following groups of original size.
Item Standard Sizes 1
Detail Select from automatic detection and standard sizes.
Size Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement, Statement-R, 8.513.5", Oficio II-R, 1115" Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio
Standard Sizes 2
Select from standard sizes except Standard Sizes 1 .
Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16 K, 16K-R Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement, Statement-R, 8.513.5", Oficio II-R, 1115", 8K, 16K, 16K-R Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Custom 1 to 4
Others
Select from Hagaki and Custom Original Size *. Enter the size that is not indicated in Standard Sizes 1 and 2**.
Size Entry
Inch models Horizontal: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Vertical: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments) Metric models Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments), Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
* **
Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size (Custom 1 to 4), refer to Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-5. The input units can be changed in the System menu. Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-16.
Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images.
1 2 3
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then [Original Size].
5-2
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Ready to send.
Place original. Original Size Standard Sizes 1 Place original. Standard Sizes 2 Others OficioII Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Destination
1
Auto Letter Statement Ledger Legal 11x15" Letter Statement 8.5x13.5"
Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others], or [Size Entry] to select original size.
Size Entry
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Ready to send.
Place original. Original Size Standard Sizes 1 Place original. Standard Sizes 2 Others Y Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Destination
(2.00 - 17.00) "
17
When you have selected [Size Entry], press [+] or [-] to set the sizes of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical). By pressing [# Keys], you can use the numeric keys.
# Keys (2.00 - 11.69) "
Size Entry
11
# Keys Cancel OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
Press [OK]. Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
OPERATION GUIDE
5-3
Sending Functions
Sending Size Selection

Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent). The table below lists the sizes. Item Standard Sizes 1 Detail Select from Same as Original Size or Standard Size. Size Inch models: Same as Original Size, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Statement, 8.513.5", Oficio II, 1115" Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, Folio Standard Sizes 2 Select from standard size except Standard Sizes 1. Inch models: A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, Folio, 8K, 16K Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Statement, 8.513.5", Oficio II, 1115", 8K, 16K Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki
Others
Select from Hagaki.
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom Original Size (page 5-2), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 5-6) are related to each other. Refer to the following table. Original Size and the size you wish to send as are Original Size Sending Size Zoom the same Specify as necessary Select [Same as Original] Select [100%] (or [Auto]) different Specify as necessary Select the required size Select [Auto]
NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you
can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom). Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images.
1 2 3
Press the Send Key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then [Sending Size].
5-4
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Ready to send.
Place original. Sending Size Standard Sizes 1 Place original. Standard Sizes 2 Others Same as Original Size Legal 8.5x13.5" Ledger Statement OficioII
Destination
Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], or [Others] to select the sending size.
Letter 11x15"
Original Zoom Paper

10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
OPERATION GUIDE
5-5
Sending Functions
Zoom
Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size. The table below lists the available options. Item 100% Auto Detail No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size) Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size.
NOTE: When zooming in or out, see Sending Size Selection on page 5-4 when selecting the sending size.
When Custom Size or Size Entry is selected as the original size, the originals are sent at normal size and zooming cannot be used. Depending on the combination of original size and sending size, the image is placed at the edge of the paper. To center the image vertically and horizontally on the page, use the centering setting described in Centering on page 5-7. Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size.
1 2 3 4
Ready to send.
Place original. Zoom Enlarge or reduce original when scanning. [100%]: Scan at actual size. [Auto]: Enlarge or reduce to match sending size/storing size. Destination
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Select the transmission size. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Zoom]. Press [100%] or [Auto].
Place original.
Original Zoom Paper
100%
Auto
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
6 7
5-6
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Centering
When you have scanned the original after specifying the original size and sending size, depending on these sizes, a margin is created at the bottom, left, or right side of paper. By using the centering, the image is placed with a margin equally created at each of the page Top/Bottom and Left/Right. Use the procedure below to center then image when sending a scanned image.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Centering]. Press [On]. Centering is performed. Press [OK]. Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
OPERATION GUIDE
5-7
Sending Functions
Mixed Sized Originals

Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can be placed in a batch and sent. In this operation, up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time. Originals of the Same Width When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows. Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)
Ledger
Letter
Letter
Ledger
Legal and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)
Legal
Letter-R
Letter-R Legal
B4 and B5
5-8
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
When the original widths are different The combinations of originals of different sizes that can be placed together are as follows.
NOTE: You cannot scan two-sided originals when placing originals of different widths. When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: Folio, A4-R, and B5-R, make sure to set the System Menu key -> Common Settings -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On] for [Folio]. For more information, refer to Automatic Detection of Originals (Available for metric models only) on page 8-13.
A3, B4, A4, B5
B4, A4-R, B5
Folio, A4-R, B5-R
OPERATION GUIDE
5-9
Sending Functions
Use the procedure below to send mixed sized originals as a batch.
1 2
Press the Send key. Place the original into the document processor.
IMPORTANT: When you place originals of different width, place the top edge of originals to align with the width guide at the backside. If the originals are placed unevenly, they may not be scanned correctly.
3
Ready to send.
Place original. Mixed Size Originals Scan all sheets in the document processor, even if differently sized, then send. *Up to 30 sheets can be placed in the document processor for mixed size originals. Destination
Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then [Mixed Sized Originals]. Select the combination of originals from [Same Width] and [Different Width].
Place original.
Original Zoom Paper
Off
Same Width
Different Width
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
5-10
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
1-sided/2-sided Selection
Select the type and binding of original depending on the original. The table below lists the binding directions for each original type. Original 1-sided Sheet Original 2-sided Sheet Original Open Book Original such as magazine and book
*
Type 1-sided 2-sided* Book
Binding
Binding Left/Right, Binding Top Binding Left, Binding Right
Only when the optional document processor is used.
Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals.
1 2 3
Ready to send.
Place original. 2-sided/Book Original 1-sided 2-sided Left Book Right Destination
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then [2sided/Book Original]. Press [1-sided], [2-sided], or [Book].
Place original.
Original Zoom Paper
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
If you selected [2-sided] or [Book], you should also select the binding direction and press [Original Orientation] to select the direction in which the original is set on the platen. Press [OK]. Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
6 7
OPERATION GUIDE
5-11
Sending Functions
To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of original. To use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen. * 1-sided / 2-sided Selection Border Erase If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation (page 8-19) setting in the System Menu, the selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions.
When placing the original on the platen
Original
[Top Edge Top]
[Top Edge Left]
When placing the original on the optional document processor
Original
[Top Edge Top]
[Top Edge Left]
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending.
1 2 3
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then [Original Orientation].
5-12
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Ready to send.
Place original. Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document's top edge. Place original.
Destination
Select original orientation from [Top Edge Top] and [Top Edge Left].
Original Zoom Paper
Top Edge Top
Top Edge Left
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
OPERATION GUIDE
5-13
Sending Functions
File Format
Select the file format of the image to send. The table below lists the file formats and their details. Adjustable range of image quality 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
File Format PDF
Color mode Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black and White Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full Color, Grayscale Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto Color (Color/Black and White), Full Color, Grayscale
TIFF
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
JPEG XPS High Comp. PDF
1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.) 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.) 1 Compression Ratio Priority to 3 Quality Priority
NOTE: In the color mode, when auto color (color/black and white) is selected, [JPEG] and [XPS] cannot be
specified, and when black and white is selected, [JPEG], [XPS] and [High Comp. PDF] cannot be specified. When [High Comp. PDF] is specified, you cannot adjust the image quality. You can use PDF encryption functions. For details, refer to the following PDF Encryption Functions. Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission.
1 2 3 4
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then [File Format]. Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS], and [High Comp. PDF].
5-14
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Ready to send.
Place original. File Format PDF Image Quality
Destination
When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality. If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], press [Encryption] and specify the encryption settings.
Place original.
TIFF
Compression Ratio Priority
Standard
Quality Priority
JPEG
Original Zoom Paper
XPS Off High Comp. PDF Encryption
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
OPERATION GUIDE
5-15
Sending Functions
PDF Encryption Functions

If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and editing PDF's by assigning a secure password. The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows. Item Compatibility Password to Open Document Password to Edit/Print Document Value Acrobat 4.0 or later, Acrobat 5.0 or later Off, On Detail Select the version that is compatible with the PDF file. Enter the password to open the PDF file Enter the password to edit the PDF file When you have entered the password to edit/print document, you can specifically limit the operation.
Off, On
When you send a PDF file, use the procedure below to encrypt the PDF file for transmission.
1 2 3
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Original/Sending Data Format], [File Format], [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], and [Encryption]. Press [ ] of Compatibility, select Acrobat 4.0 and later or Acrobat 5.0 and later.
File Format - Encryption Compatibility Acrobat 4.0 and later Encryption Level: Middle(40-bit) Password to Open Document Off On Password Confirmation
Password to Edit/Print Document
Off On
Password Confirmation Detail Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
When you enter the password to open the PDF file, select [On] of Password to Open Document. Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page

5-16
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
7 8 9
Press [Confirmation] and enter the password again for confirmation. Then press [OK]. When you enter the password to edit the PDF file, select [On] of Password to Edit/Print Document. In the same way as the entry of Password to Open Document, enter the password to change the PDF file.
10 Press [Detail].
File Format - Detail
11 Restrict the access level of the PDF file. Press [

Not Allowed Not Allowed
Printing Allowed Changes Allowed
] of Printing Allowed to select the item (the scope of limit). The item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4.
Copying of Text/Images/Others
Disable Enable
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
The table below shows the available settings. Item Not Allowed Allowed(Low Resolution only)* Allowed
*
Detail Make the printing of PDF file impossible Can print the PDF file only in low resolution Can print the PDF file in original resolution
Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
OPERATION GUIDE
5-17
Sending Functions
12 Press [
] of Changes Allowed, and select the item (the scope of limit). The item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4.
The table below shows the available settings. Item Not Allowed Commenting Inserting/Deleting/ Rotating Pages* Page Layout except extracting Pages** Any except extracting Pages
* **
Detail Cannot change the PDF file Can only add commenting Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the PDF file Can change the page layout except extracting the pages of the PDF file Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of the PDF file
Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility. Only displayed when [Acrobat 4.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
13 From Copying of Text/Images/Others, select

[Disable] or [Enable]. The table below shows the available settings. Item Disable Enable Detail Prohibit the copying of text and objects on the PDF file. Can copy text and objects on the PDF file.
14 Press [OK] three times to return to Original/

Sending Data Format.
15 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.
5-18
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Image Quality
Select image quality suitable to the type of original. The table below shows the quality options. Item Text+Photo Photo Text for OCR Detail Text and photos together. For photos taken with a camera. Only text, no photos. For documents to be read by OCR.
Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals.
1 2 3
Ready to send.
Place original. Original Image Select original image type for best results. [for OCR]: For documents to be read by OCR. Place original. Destination
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Original Image]. Select the original image.
Text+Photo Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --for OCR Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Photo
Text
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
OPERATION GUIDE
5-19
Sending Functions
Adjusting Density
Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals. The table below shows the available settings. Item Manual Auto Detail Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels. Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original.
The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below.
1 2 3
Ready to send.
Place original. Density Destination
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Density]. When selecting manual density adjustment, press [-3] to [+3] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust density. When selecting auto density adjustment, press [Auto].
Auto Place original. Lighter Normal Darker

Status
-2 -2.5 -1.5
-1 -0.5
0 +0.5
+1 +1.5
+2 +2.5
+3
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
5-20
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Scan Resolution
Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes), the better the image quality becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity) and longer scanning and sending times. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine, 200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600x600dpi. The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below.
1 2 3
Ready to send.
Place original. Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. The larger the number, the better the image resolution. Place original. Destination
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Scan Resolution]. Select the resolution.
600x600dpi Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut

Status
400x400dpi Ultra Fine
300x300dpi
200x400dpi Super Fine
200x200dpi Fine Cancel
200x100dpi Normal OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
OPERATION GUIDE
5-21
Sending Functions
Sharpness
Select the sharpness of the image outline. The table below shows the available settings. Item Sharpen Unsharpen Detail Emphasize the image outline. Make letters and lines appear sharper. Blur the image outline. Can weaken a Moire effect (grids appearing as wavelike patterns when scanning printed photos).
NOTE: You cannot specify the sharpness if you selected [Black & White] in Color / Grayscale / Black and
White Selection (see page 5-24). Use the procedure below to set the sharpness when sending scanned images.
1 2 3
Ready to send.
Place original. Sharpness Destination
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Sharpness]. Press [-3] to [+3] (Unsharpen - Sharpen) to adjust the sharpness.
Place original. Unsharpen Sharpen

Status
-2
-1
+1
+2
+3
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
5-22
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Background Density Adjustment

Lightens the background of the colored original when it is too dark.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the background density if you selected [Black & White] in Color / Grayscale / Black
and White Selection (see page 5-24). Use the procedure below to set the background density when sending scanned images.
1 2 3
Ready to send.
Place original. Background Density Adj. Off Background Lighter Place original. On 1 2 3 4 5 Darker Destination
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Background Density Adj.]. Press [On], and press [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density.
Original Zoom Paper

10/10/2008 10:10
Status
5 6
OPERATION GUIDE
5-23
Sending Functions
Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection

This feature allows you to select the select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. You can select from Auto(Color/Gray), Auto(Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale or Black & White. Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images.
1 2 3
Ready to send.
Place original. Color Selection Select scanning color. Select [Auto Color] to automatically send color originals in full color and black & white originals in black & white. Place original. Destination
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Color Selection]. Select the color mode to be used for scanning.
Auto Color (Color/Gray) Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Full Color Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Auto Color (Color/B & W)
Grayscale
Black & White
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
5-24
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Continuous Scan
When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after another until you press [Scan Finish]. Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning. Original Size selection Original Orientation 1-sided / 2-sided selection Scan density Image quality Scan resolution Color selection Sending Size selection Zoom Border Erase
The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below.
1 2
Ready to send.
Place original. Continuous Scan Scan a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job. *Settings can be changed during scanning. Destination
Press the Send key. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous Scan]. Press [On]. Continuous Scan is selected.
Place original.
Original Zoom Paper
Off
On
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Status
4 5 6
Press [OK]. Specify the destination. Place the original, and press the Start key. When the scanning is completed, change the settings as necessary.
Place the next original, and press the Start key. Scan the remaining originals by the same procedure. When you have scanned all the originals, press [Finish Scan] to start sending.
OPERATION GUIDE
5-25
Sending Functions
Border Erase
Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when scanning and sending originals. The following options can be selected. Border Erase Sheet Erases black borders around the single sheet original.
Original
Copy
Border Erase Book Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick books. You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book.
Original Copy
Individual Border Erase Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.
Original
Copy
In each option, the available ranges are as below. Input units Inch models Metric models Border Erase Range 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments) 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)
5-26
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Border Erase to Back Page

When scanning a 2-sided original, this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original. The table below shows the available settings. Item Same as Front Page Do Not Erase Detail Border Erase performed using the same setting as the front page No Border Erase performed on the back page
NOTE: You can change the default setting for Border Erase to Back Page. For details, refer to Border Erase
for Back Page on page 8-32. Use the procedure below to erase borders when sending scanned originals.
1 2 3
Ready to send.
Place original. Border Erase Off Border (0.00 - 2.00) Destination
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Border Erase]. Press [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase borders for a book. Use [+] or [-] to enter the width in Border or Gutter. Press [# Keys] to use the number keys for entry. Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the individual border erase.
0.25
Place original. Border Erase Sheet Border Erase Book Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
"
# Keys Gutter (0.00 - 2.00)
Same as Front Page Back Page "
0.25
# Keys Cancel OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Use [+] or [-] to enter the border width or press [# Keys] and enter the width using the numeric keys. Press [Original Orientation] to select the original orientation from either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left], and press [OK]. For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and then press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
Ready to send.
Place original. Border Erase Off Top Place original. Border Erase Sheet Border Erase Book Original Zoom Paper : --: 100% : --Preview Add Shortcut
Status
Destination
(0.00 - 2.00)
0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
" " " " Top Edge Top Original Orientation Same as Front Page Back Page
Bottom Left Right
# Keys Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
OPERATION GUIDE
5-27
Sending Functions
Enter Document Name/File Name

This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. You can specify a default for the document name. Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending.
1 2 3
Ready to send.
Place original. File Name Entry Add a file name. Additional information such as Job No. and Date and Time can also be set. File Name Destination
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name Entry]. Press [File Name].
doc
Additional Info
& [ Date and Time Job No.
] Date and Time
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Enter the document name, and press [OK].
NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered for the

document name.
6 7 8
Press [Job No.] to enter the job No., and [Date and Time] to enter the date and time. Press [OK]. Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.
5-28
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Enter E-mail Subject and Body

When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the E-mail. Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail.
1 2
Ready to send.
Place original. E-mail Subject/Body Subject Destination
Press the Send key. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [E-mail Subject/ Body]. Press [Subject].
Place original.
Body
Original Zoom Paper

10/10/2008 10:10
Status
Enter the subject, and press [OK].

subject.
5 6
Press [Body]. Enter the body and press [OK].

body.
7 8
OPERATION GUIDE
5-29
Sending Functions
WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
NOTE: For information on operating the computer, refer to the operating system help for your computer.
To use WSD Scan, WSD Scan Setup (page 8-93) must be set to On in the network settings. Procedure using this machine
1 2
Press the Send Key. Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. Displays the screen for sending.
3
WSD Scan - Selecting Computer Select the destination computer and press [OK].
Press [WSD Scan]. Press [From Operation Panel].
4
Computer Name
pc00010 pc000102 pc000103 pc000104 pc000105

1/1
Detail
Cancel
Status
Back
Next
10/10/2008 10:10
Select the destination computer from the computer list and press [OK]. You can view information on the selected computer by pressing [Detail].
6 7
Press [OK]. Press the Start key. Sending begins.
NOTE: To use WSD Scan from your computer, press [From Computer] in step 4 and then scan the original from the computer.
5-30
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Job Finish Notice

This feature sends an e-mail providing notification that transmission has been completed. Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings.
1 2 3
Ready to send.
Place original. Job Finish Notice Off Destination
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish Notice]. To select the destination from the address book, press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and then press [Address Book] in the next screen. Select the destination to be notified, then press [OK]. You can view information on the notification destination by pressing [Detail].
Address Book
Destination
Detail
Address Entry
Detail
Address Book
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Specify the destination to send the finish notice, and press [OK].
NOTE: For the procedure to select the destination from the Address Book, refer Specifying Destination on page 3-35.
Ready to send.
Place original. Job Finish Notice Off E-mail Address Destination
To directly enter the address, press [Address Entry] and then [E-mail Address].
Address Book
Address Entry
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
7 8 9
Enter the E-mail address, and press [OK]. Press [OK]. Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending. When the sending is completed, the finish notice is sent to the specified E-mail address.
OPERATION GUIDE
5-31
Sending Functions
Send and Print

When you send originals, this feature allows you to print a copy of the document being sent. The procedure for using Send and Print is explained below.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Send and Print]. Press [On]. Press [OK]. Specify the destination and press the Start key. Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted document is printed.
5-32
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Send and Store

When you send originals, this feature allows you to store a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box. The procedure for using Send and Store is explained below.
1 2 3
Ready to send.
Place original. Send and Store Off Custom Box
No. Name Used Area
Press the Send key. Place the originals on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup], [ Store]. Press [On]. ], and then [Send and
Destination
On 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 06 BOX001 07 BOX002 08 BOX003 09 BOX004 10 BOX005 6% 4% 8% 4% 2% Detail
2/2
Add Shortcut
Status
Cancel
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be stored. If a password entry screen for the Custom Box appears, enter the password. You can view information on the selected Custom Box by pressing [Detail].
6 7
Press [OK]. Specify the destination and press the Start key. Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted document is stored in the specified Custom Box.
OPERATION GUIDE
5-33
Sending Functions
FTP Encrypted TX
This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them. If you select [On] in this option, you can then select the encryption method in the basic send screen. Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files.
1 2 3 4 5
Press the Send Key. Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. Press [Advanced Setup], [ Encrypted TX]. Press [On]. Press [OK]. ], and then [FTP
NOTE: Click Advanced -> Secure Protocols in the COMMAND CENTER. Be sure that SSL of Secure Protocol Settings is On and more than two effective encryptions are selected in Clientside Settings. For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.
5-34
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Functions
Color Type
This sets the color type when you send color documents. The table below shows the available settings. Item RGB sRGB Match the color reproduction space between sRGB compatible systems. Detail
Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine.
1 2
Send - Color Type Specify the color type to send color images.
Press System Menu key. Press [Send] and [Change] of Color Type. Select [RGB] or [sRGB].
3
Profile: RGB FINE 1
RGB
sRGB
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [OK].
About Color Profiles

The color scanner provides color profiles to adjust color.
NOTE: The color profile data import method varies for every TWAIN/WIA-compliant software. Use the color
profile after carefully reading the manual included with your TWAIN/WIA-complaint software.
Selecting a color profile compatible with this device 1 Select the color profile found in the CD included
with this scanner CD (Product Library) under the Color Profile folder.
NOTE: Use the indicated color profiles when you

chose RGB in color type.
OPERATION GUIDE
5-35
Sending Functions
5-36
OPERATION GUIDE
6 Document Box
This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box. Using a Custom Box .....................................................6-2 Using a Job Box..........................................................6-10 Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ....................................................................................6-16 Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ...6-18
OPERATION GUIDE
6-1
Document Box
Using a Custom Box

NOTE: In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User
Logon privileges, refer to User Privileges on page 3-44.
Creating a New Custom Box

Use the procedure below to create a new box in the user box.
1
Custom Box.
Press the Document Box key. Press [Custom Box] and then [Register/Edit Box].
1/1
Register/Edit Box

Status
Detail
Open FAX Box

2008/10/10 10:10
Job Box
Removable Memory
3 4
Press [Add]. Press [Change] for each item, enter the information and then press [OK]. The table below lists the items to be set.
Item Box No
Detail Enter the box number by pressing [-, +] or number keys. The box number can be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should have a unique number. If you enter 0000, the smallest number available will be automatically assigned. Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters. Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to protect the box. Entering a password is not mandatory. Enter the same password of up to 16 characters in both [Password] and [Confirm Password].
Box Name
Box Password
6-2
OPERATION GUIDE
Document Box
Item Usage Restriction
Detail To preserve the hard disk capacity, the storage capacity for a box can be restricted. To enable a capacity restriction enter a value for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes by pressing [-, +] or number keys. You can enter a limit between 1 and 30,000. (Changes according to the number of created custom boxes.) Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time. Press [On] to enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the numeric keys to enter the number of days for which documents are stored. You can enter any number between 1 and 31 day(s). To disable automatic file deletion, press [Off]. Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new documents are stored. To overwrite old documents, press [Permit]. To retain old documents, press [Prohibit].
Auto File Deletion
Overwrite Setting
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, "Owner" and "Permission" are also displayed. Refer to Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled on page 3-45.
5
Setting the document deletion time
Check the details you have entered and then press [Register]. The Custom Box is created.
Sets the time when documents stored in a custom box are deleted. The procedure for using Auto File Deletion Time is explained below.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next] of Custom Box, [Next] of Default Setting and then [Change] of Auto File Deletion Time.
OPERATION GUIDE
6-3
Document Box
Set the time at which the document is deleted by pressing [+], [-] or the numeric keys to set the hours and minutes.
4 Storing Documents
Press [OK]. The time for document deletion is set.
The procedure for storing documents in a custom box is explained below.
1 2
Custom Box.
Press the Document Box key. Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen. Press [Custom Box], select the box where the document will be stored and then press [Store File].
1/1
Register/Edit Box
NOTE: The Custom Box to store a file needs to be created in advance.

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

Status
Detail
Open FAX Box

2008/10/10 10:10
Job Box
Removable Memory
4 5
Select the type of originals, scanning density, etc., as necessary. Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the data is stored in the specified Custom Box.
NOTE: Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.
6-4
OPERATION GUIDE
Document Box
Printing Documents
The procedure for printing documents in a custom box is explained below.
1 2
Press the Document Box key. Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the document you want to print and press [Open].

Box:
3
File Name Date and Time 10/10/2008 09:40 10/10/2008 09:50 10/10/2008 10:00 Size 21 MB 21 MB 21 MB
1/1
Select the document you wish to print by checking the checkbox. The document is marked with a checkmark.
0001 0002 0003
0404200710574501 0404200710574511 0404200710574521
NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and

Detail
remove the checkmark.
Print
Join
Move
Delete
Store File
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4 5 6
Press [Print]. Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as desired. Press the Start key. Printing of the selected document begins.
OPERATION GUIDE
6-5
Document Box
Editing Documents
This function allows you to move documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes or to join multiple documents together. Moving a Document The procedure for moving documents is explained below.
1 2
Press the Document Box key. Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the document you want to move and press [Open].

Box:
3
1/1
Select the document in the list that you want to move by pressing the checkbox. The document is marked with a checkmark.
0001 0002 0003
0404200710574501 0404200710574511 0404200710574521

Detail
Print
Join
Move
Delete
Store File
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4
Job Box.
Move to Custom Box Select the destination box and press [Move]. Document
Press [Move]. Select the destination box.
0001 0002 0003 0004
Document1 Document2 Document3 Document4
Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator
2 MB 3 MB 3 MB 5 MB
Up
Open
Cancel
Status
Back
Move
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [Move] and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The selected document is moved.
NOTE: If the box to which the document is to be moved is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
6-6
OPERATION GUIDE
Document Box
Joining Documents The procedure for joining documents in a custom box is explained below.
NOTE: You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. If necessary, move the
documents to be joined beforehand.
1 2
Press the Document Box key. Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the documents you want to join and press [Open].

Box:
3
1/1
Select the documents in the list that you wish to join by pressing the checkbox. The document is marked with a checkmark. You can join up to 10 documents.
0001 0002 0003
0404200710574501 0404200710574511 0404200710574521
Detail

Print Join Move Delete Store File

10:10
Close
Status 10/10/2008
4
Join Confirm the order of documents to combine.
Press [Join]. Arrange the documents into the order in which they are to be joined. Highlight the document you want to rearrange and press [Up] or [Down] to move it to the correct place in the sequence.
5
File Name 2008101010574501 2008101010574511 2008101010574521 Date and Time 10/10/2008 09:40 10/10/2008 09:50 10/10/2008 10:10 Size 21 MB 21 MB 21 MB
1/1
Up
Down
Cancel
Status
Next
10/10/2008 10:10
6 7
Press [Next]. Press [File Name], enter the file name for the joined document and press [OK].
NOTE: Enter up to 32 characters as the file name.
OPERATION GUIDE
6-7
Document Box
Press [Join] and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The documents are joined.
NOTE: After joining, the original documents are left unchanged. Delete the documents if they are no longer needed.
6-8
OPERATION GUIDE
Document Box
Deleting Documents
The procedure for deleting documents in a custom box is explained below.
1 2
Press the Document Box key. Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the document you want to delete and press [Open].

Box:
3
1/1
Select the document you wish to delete by checking the checkbox. The document is marked with a checkmark.
0001 0002 0003
0404200710574501 0404200710574511 0404200710574521
Detail
Print
Join
Move
Delete
Store File
NOTE: [Delete] is disabled until a document is selected. To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.
10:10
Close
Status 10/10/2008
4 5
Press [Delete]. The delete confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes]. The document is deleted.
OPERATION GUIDE
6-9
Document Box
Using a Job Box

Private Print/Stored Job Box
Private Print/Stored Job Box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print/ Stored Job. Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print or Stored Job using the printer driver. Printing a Document in Private Print/Stored Job Box You can print documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box. Use the procedure below to print a document.
1 2 3
Job Box.
Private Print/Stored Job User Name 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 User Files 5 2 1 1 1 Open
1/2
Press the Document Box key. Press [Job Box]. Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open]. Select the creator of the document to print and press [Open].
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Job Box.
User: File Name 1File 2File 3File 4File 5File Print Date and Time 10/10/2008 09:40 10/10/2008 09:45 10/10/2008 09:50 10/10/2008 09:55 10/10/2008 10:00 Size 21 MB 30 MB 36 MB 21 MB 30 MB Delete
1/1
Select the document and press [Print].
NOTE: If a password is set for the Custom Box in

advance, enter the correct password.
Detail
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
6 7 8
If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the numeric keys. Specify the number of copies to print as desired. Press [Start Print] to start printing. Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.
6-10
OPERATION GUIDE
Document Box
Deleting a Document You can delete documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box. Use the procedure below to delete a document.
1 2 3
Job Box.
Private Print/Stored Job User Name 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 User Files 5 2 1 1 1 Open
1/2
Press the Document Box key. Press [Job Box]. Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open]. Select the creator of the document and press [Open].
6
Close
Status
10/10/2008
10:10
Job Box.
1/1
To delete the document, select the document and press [Delete]. When the delete confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
Detail
If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the numeric keys and the document is deleted.
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print Box

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job. Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver. Setting the Number of Stored Jobs To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs. Use the procedure below to set the number of stored jobs.
OPERATION GUIDE
6-11
Document Box
Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next] of Job Box, then [Change] of Quick Copy Job Retention. Press [+] or [] to enter the maximum number of stored jobs. You can enter any number between 0 and 50. You can also enter the number using the numeric keys.
Document Box/Removable Memory - Quick Copy Job Retention Set the maximum number of quick copy/proof print jobs to retain. Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number. *Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.
(0 - 50)
32
job(s)

Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
4
Printing a Document
Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is set.
You can print documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box. Use the procedure below to print a document.
1 2 3
Job Box.
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold User Name 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 User Files 5 2 1 1 1 Open
1/2
Press the Document Box key. Press [Job Box]. Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] and press [Open]. Select the creator of the document and press [Open].
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
6-12
OPERATION GUIDE
Document Box
Job Box.
1/1
Select the document to print, and press [Print].
Detail
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
6 7
Deleting a Document
Specify the number of prints as desired. Press [Start Print] to start printing.
You can delete documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box. Use the procedure below to delete a document.
1 2
Job Box.
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold User Name 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 User Files 5 2 1 1 1 Open
1/2
Press the Document Box key. Press [Job Box], [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold], then [Open]. Select the creator of the document and press [Open].
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Job Box.
1/1
Select the document to delete and press [Delete]. The delete confirmation screen appears.
Detail
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Press [Yes]. The document is deleted.
OPERATION GUIDE
6-13
Document Box
Repeat Copy Box

Setting the Number of Stored Jobs To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs. Use the procedure below to specify the maximum number of stored jobs.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next] of Job Box, [Change] of Repeat Copy Job Retention. Use the [+] and [] keys or the numeric keys to enter the maximum number of stored jobs. You can enter any number between 0 and 50.
Document Box/Removable Memory - Repeat Copy Job Retention Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain. Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number. *Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.
(0 - 50)
32
job(s)
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10

4
Printing a Document
Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is set.
You can print the documents stored in the Repeat Copy box. Use the procedure below to print a document.
1 2 3
Press the Document Box key. Press [Job Box]. Select [Repeat Copy] box, and press [Open].
6-14
OPERATION GUIDE
Document Box
Job Box.
Repeat Copy Name 1010200800101002 Date and Time 10/10/2008 10:00 Size 21 MB
Select the document to print and press [Print].
1/1
Detail
Print
Delete
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
5 6
If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the numeric keys. Press [Start Print] to start printing. The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the main power switch is turned off.
Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time. The table below shows the available settings. Item Off Detail Temporary documents are not automatically deleted. However, the temporary documents will be deleted when the power is turned off. Documents are deleted after 1 hour. Documents are deleted after 4 hours. Documents are deleted after 1 day. Documents are deleted after 1 week.
1 hour 4 hours 1 day 1 week
Use the procedure below to set automatic deletion for temporary documents.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next] of Job Box, then [Change] of Deletion of Job Retention. Select the time for automatic deletion. To deactivate automatic deletion, press [Off].
Press [OK].
NOTE: This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function setting,
temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off.
OPERATION GUIDE
6-15
Document Box
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory

Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB memory without having to use a computer.
Limitations
The following file types can be printed: PDF file (Version 1.5) TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format) JPEG file XPS file Encrypted PDF file
PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf). Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels. Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine. Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot (A1). We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error free if a USB hub is used.
Printing
Print documents stored in the removable USB memory.
1 2
Press the Document Box key. Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot (A1).
IMPORTANT: Use USB memory formatted by this machine. If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used, The removable memory is not formatted. may appear. To format a USB memory, press [Format] and follow the instructions on the screen.
3 4
Press [Removable Memory]. Select the folder containing the file to be printed and press [Open]. The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
NOTE: To return to a higher level folder, press [Up].
6-16
OPERATION GUIDE
Document Box
Removable Memory.
Removable Memory Name 1 Document 2 Document 3 Document 4 Document 5 Document Print Custom Box
Status
5
Date and Time Size Up 1 MB 3 MB 4 MB 1 MB 2 MB Open FAX Box
10/10/2008 10:10 001/999
Select the file to be printed and press [Print].
10/10/2008 09:30 10/10/2008 09:40 10/10/2008 09:50 10/10/2008 10:00 10/10/2008 10:05 Delete Job Box Detail Removable Memory
Memory Information Remove Memory Store File
6 7 Removing USB Memory

Remove the USB memory.
Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired. Press the Start key. Printing of the selected file begins.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.
1 2
Removable Memory.
Status
Press the Document Box key. Press [Removable Memory]. Press [Remove Memory].
3
10/10/2008 10:10 001/999
Remove the USB memory after Removable Memory can be safely removed. is displayed.
OPERATION GUIDE
6-17
Document Box
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)

This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS or high-compression PDF format.
Storing Documents
The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below.
1 2
Press the Document Box key. Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot (A1).
IMPORTANT: Use only USB memory that has been formatted on this machine. If USB memory formatted on another device is used, The removable memory is not formatted message may appear. To format the USB memory, press [Format].
3 4
Press [Removable Memory]. Select the folder where the file will be stored and press [Open]. The machine will display the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
Removable Memory.
Status
5
10/10/2008 10:10 001/999
Press [Store File].
6 7
Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired. Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory.
IMPORTANT: When removing the USB memory, ensure that you use the correct removal procedure, as described in Removing USB Memory on page 6-17.
6-18
OPERATION GUIDE
7 Status / Job Cancel

This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being processed or waiting to be printed. This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the status of devices, and how to cancel the fax communication. Checking Job Status .....................................................7-2 Checking Job History ....................................................7-9 Sending the Job Log History....................................... 7-11 Pause and Resumption of Jobs ..................................7-13 Canceling of Jobs .......................................................7-14 Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ...............................7-14 Reordering Print Jobs .................................................7-15 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper ...................................................................7-16 Device/Communication ...............................................7-17
OPERATION GUIDE
7-1
Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job Status

Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens

The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Sending Jobs - Timer waiting, and Storing Jobs. The following job statuses are available. Screen Printing Jobs Job statuses to be displayed Copy Printer FAX reception E-mail reception Printing from Document Box Job Report /List Printing data from removable memory FAX transmission PC (SMB/FTP) transmission E-mail Application Multiple destination Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission Scan FAX Printer
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Displaying Status Screens

Use the procedure below to display the Status screen.
1
Status Status Job Type
Job No.
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. The Status screen appears. Press either of [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing Jobs] to check the status. To check the scheduled transmission job, press [Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job]. For an explanation of the screen, refer to Details of the Status Screens on page 7-3.
2
Scheduled Job Log All
Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status
438
14:47
abc@def.com
InProcess
1/1
Cancel
Detail
Printing Jobs
Status
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Device/ Communication
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2008 10:10
7-2
OPERATION GUIDE
Status / Job Cancel
Details of the Status Screens The items and keys displayed on the status screens are as follows. For information on how to display the Status screen, see Displaying Status Screens on page 7-2. Printing Jobs Status Screen
Job No.
Log
All
End Date Type
7
Job Name User Name Result
000081 01/25 14:14 000082 01/25 14:22 000083 01/25 14:30
doc20070506142153 doc20070506142210 doc20070506142368
AAAAA AAAAA AAAAA
InProcess Waiting Waiting

1/1
1 8
Pause All Print Jobs Printing Jobs
Status
3 9
Cancel
4 10
Priority Override Storing Jobs
5 11
Move Up Detail
6 12
Sending Jobs
Paper/Supplies
2008/10/10 10:10
The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen. No. 1 2 3 Item / Key Job No. Accepted Time Type Detail Acceptance No. of job Accepted Time of job Icons that indicate the job type Copy job Printer job FAX reception E-mail reception Job from Document Box Report / List Data from Removable Memory 4 5 6 Job Name User Name Status Job Name or file name User Name for the executed job Status of job InProcess: The status before starting to print such as when scanning originals. Printing: Printing Waiting: Print Waiting Pause: Pausing print job or error Canceling: Canceling the job
OPERATION GUIDE
7-3
Status / Job Cancel
No. 7 8 [
Item / Key ] of Job Type
Detail Sorts by specific type of job Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the printing jobs will be resumed. Select the job to be canceled from the list, and press this key. Select the job to be overridden, and press this key. (Refer to Priority Override for Waiting Jobs on page 7-14) In the list, select the job that you want to move up the job queue and press this key. (Refer to Reordering Print Jobs on page 7-15) Select the job for displaying detailed information from the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of Histories on page 7-10)
[Pause All Print Jobs]
9 10
[Cancel] [Priority Override]
11
[Move Up]
12
[Detail]
7-4
OPERATION GUIDE
Status / Job Cancel
Sending Jobs Status screen

Job No.
Scheduled Job
Log
All
Accepted Time Type
7
Job Name User Name Status
438
14:47
abc@def.com
InProcess
6
1/1
8
Cancel Detail
Printing Jobs
Status
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2008 10:10
The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen. No. 1 2 3 Item / Key Job No. Accepted Time Type Detail Acceptance No. of job Accepted Time of job Icons that indicate the job type Sending Job FAX Sending Job PC (SMB/FTP) Sending Job E-mail Sending Job Application Sending Job Multiple 4 Destination Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail address, or server name) User Name for the executed job Status of job InProcess: The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals Sending: Sending Waiting: Sending Waiting Canceling: Canceling the job Pause: Pausing the job Only selected type of jobs are displayed. Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
5 6
User Name Status
7 8
] of Job Type
[Cancel]
OPERATION GUIDE
7-5
Status / Job Cancel
No. 9
Item / Key [Detail]
Detail Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of Histories on page 7-10)
Storing Jobs Status screen

Job No.
Log
All
Accepted Time Type
7
Job Name User Name Status
438
14:47
doc20070225144758
InProcess
6
1/1
8
Cancel
9
Detail
Printing Jobs
Status
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2008 10:10
The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen. No. 1 2 3 Display / Key Job No. Accepted Time Type Details Acceptance No. of job Accepted Time of job Icons that indicate the job type Storing Job Scan Storing Job Printer Storing Job FAX 4 5 6 Job Name User Name Status Job name or file name is displayed. User Name for the executed job Status of job InProcess: The status before starting to save such as during scanning originals Storing: Storing Data Canceling: Canceling the job Pause: Pausing the job
7-6
OPERATION GUIDE
Status / Job Cancel
No. 7 8 9 [
Display / Key ] of Job Type
Details Only selected type of jobs are displayed. Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key. Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of Histories on page 7-10)
[Cancel] [Detail]
Checking the Detailed Information of Jobs

Check the detailed information of each job. Use the procedure below to check a job's information.
1 2
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing Jobs]. To check the scheduled transmission, press [Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job].

Job No.
3
Scheduled Job Log All
Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status
Select the job whose details you wish to check from the list, and press [Detail]. Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.
438
14:47
abc@def.com
InProcess
1/1
Cancel
Detail
Printing Jobs
Status
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2008 10:10
Detail Job No.: Job No.: 000080 Job Type:
000080 Status/Destination: Processing Destination: ABCDE Detail
Use [ ] or [ information.
] to see the next or previous page of
Sending Job - E-mail User Name: User1 Job Name: doc20070404115151 Accepted Time: 10:10:10
1/2
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
OPERATION GUIDE
7-7
Status / Job Cancel
Detail Job No.: Job No.: 000080 Job Type:
000080 Status/Destination: Processing Destination: ABCDE Detail
In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by pressing [Detail] in Status/Destination.
Sending Job - E-mail User Name: User1 Job Name: doc20070404115151 Accepted Time: 10:10:10
1/2
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Detail Job No.:
000081
Job Type Type
All Destination Status Sending Waiting 1/2
doc20070404131415 User01
Status/Destination is displayed when address is selected. Press [Detail] to display the list. Press [ ] or [ ], select a destination and press [Detail]. Information on the selected job is displayed for checking.
Detail
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].
7-8
OPERATION GUIDE
Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job History

Check the history of completed jobs.
NOTE: Job history is also available by COMMAND CENTER or KM-NET VIEWER from the computer.
Available Job History Screens

The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The following job histories are available. Screen Printing Jobs Job histories to be displayed Copy Printer FAX reception E-mail reception Printing from Document Box Job Report / List Printing data from removable memory FAX PC (SMB/FTP) E-mail Application Multiple destination Scan FAX Printer
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Displaying Job History Screen

The procedure for displaying Job History Screen is explained below.
1
Job No.
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Press either of [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing Jobs] to check the log, and press [Log].
2
Log All
End Date Type Job Name User Name Result
000080 01/25 14:14 000081 01/25 14:22 000082 01/25 14:23 000083 01/25 14:24 000084 01/25 14:30
doc20070225141427 doc20070225142253 doc20070225142310 doc20070225142458 doc20070225143034
Completed Completed Completed Error Completed Detail

001/001
Printing Jobs
Status
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Paper/Supplies
2008/10/10 10:10
OPERATION GUIDE
7-9
Status / Job Cancel
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories

Check the detailed information of each history. Display of the detailed information of Job Finish history Use the procedure below to check the job finish history.
1 2
Job No.
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs] or [Storing Jobs] and then [Log]. Select the job to check details from the list, and press [Detail]. Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.
3
Log All
000080 01/25 14:14 000081 01/25 14:22 000082 01/25 14:23 000083 01/25 14:24 000084 01/25 14:30
doc20070225141427 doc20070225142253 doc20070225142310 doc20070225142458 doc20070225143034
Completed Completed Completed Error Completed Detail

001/001
NOTE: To check the information of the next/previous

page, press [ ] or [ ].
Printing Jobs
Status
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Paper/Supplies
2008/10/10 10:10
To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].
7-10
OPERATION GUIDE
Status / Job Cancel
Sending the Job Log History

You can send the job log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
Setting the destination

Set the destination to which job log histories are sent. Use the procedure below to set the destination.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Job Log History and then [Change] of Destination. To enter a new e-mail address, press [E-mail Address Entry]. Press [E-mail Address], enter the destination email address and then press [OK].
To set an address from the address book, press [Email Address Book]. Select the destination from the address book and press [OK].
NOTE: For information on specifying destinations,

refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-35.
Press [OK]. The selected e-mail addresses is displayed.
NOTE: You can view information on the selected

destinations by pressing [Detail].
6 Automatic Job Log History Transmission
Press [OK] again.
This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged. Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Job Log History and then [Change] of Auto Sending.
OPERATION GUIDE
7-11
Status / Job Cancel
Report - Auto Sending Send job log history to the specified destination after a set number of jobs have been logged.
Press [On] and enter the number of jobs in the job log history print by using [+]/[-] or the numeric keys. You can enter any number between 1 and 1500.
Off
Jobs (1 - 1500)
On
100
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
4 Manual Job Log History Transmission
Press [OK].
You can also send the job log history to the specified destinations manually. Use the procedure below to send the job log history manually.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Job Log History and then [Execute] of Send Job Log History. When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The job log history is sent.
Setting E-mail Subject

Set the subject automatically entered when sending job log histories by e-mail. Use the procedure below to set the subject.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Job Log History and then [Change] of Subject. Enter an e-mail subject not more than 60 characters.

Check that the entry is correct and press [OK].
7-12
OPERATION GUIDE
Status / Job Cancel
Pause and Resumption of Jobs

Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting. The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below.
1
Job No.
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Press [Pause All Print Jobs] on the Printing Jobs Status screen. Printing is paused.
2
Log All
000081 01/25 14:14 000082 01/25 14:22 000083 01/25 14:30
doc20070506142153 doc20070506142210 doc20070506142368
AAAAA AAAAA AAAAA

1/1

Status
Cancel
Move Up
Detail
Sending Jobs
Paper/Supplies
2008/10/10 10:10
When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, press [Resume All Print Jobs].
OPERATION GUIDE
7-13
Status / Job Cancel
Canceling of Jobs
For more information on cancelling jobs, refer to the Canceling Jobs on page 3-46.
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs

Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first.
NOTE: A current job that is designated as Priority Override cannot be suspended. After the current Priority
Override job is completed, the next Priority Override job is printed. The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.
1 2
Job No.
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Press [Printing Jobs]. Select the job to be given priority, and press [Priority Override].
3
Log All
000081 01/25 14:14 000082 01/25 14:22 000083 01/25 14:30
doc20070506142153 doc20070506142210 doc20070506142368
AAAAA AAAAA AAAAA

1/1

Status
Cancel
Move Up
Detail
Sending Jobs
Paper/Supplies
2008/10/10 10:10
Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The current job in printing is suspended, and the job for override printing starts. When the Priority Override is completed, the printing job that has been suspended will be resumed.
7-14
OPERATION GUIDE
Status / Job Cancel
Reordering Print Jobs

This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority.
NOTE: You cannot assign a higher priority than the job currently being printed or jobs that have been queued due to an interruption. Nor can you assign a priority higher than a job being processed. You cannot lower a job's priority.
The procedure for reordering print jobs is explained below.
1 2
Job No.
Press the Status/Cancel key. Press the [Printing Jobs]. Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and press [Move Up]. The priority of the selected job is increased by 1 . To further raise the job's priority, press [Move Up] again. Each time you press [Move Up], the priority increases by 1.
3
Log All
000081 01/25 14:14 000082 01/25 14:22 000083 01/25 14:30
doc20070506142153 doc20070506142210 doc20070506142368
AAAAA AAAAA AAAAA

1/1

Status
Cancel
Move Up
Detail
Sending Jobs
Paper/Supplies
2008/10/10 10:10
OPERATION GUIDE
7-15
Status / Job Cancel
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper

Check the remaining amount of toner, paper, and staples on the touch panel. Use the procedure below to check the remaining amounts.
1
Status
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Press [Paper/Supplies] to check the remaining amount of toner, paper, and staples.
Toner Information
Toner Status 100% 100% 100% 100%
Paper
Size Type Status
Others
Type Status
Black (K) Cyan (C) Magenta (M) Yellow (Y) Waste Toner OK
Ledger Ledger Letter Letter Letter
Plain Plain Plain Plain Plain
30% 30% 30% 30% 0%
Staple A
OK
Printing Jobs
Status
Sending Jobs
Storing Jobs
Paper/Supplies
10/10/2008 10:10
The items you can check are described below. Remaining amount of toner You can check the remaining amount of each color toner as one of 11 levels from 100 to 0%. Status of waste toner box You can check the status of waste toner box. Paper You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper source. Others You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.
NOTE: If the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher and punch unit are installed, the
Others section provides the status of the punch waste box and whether or not staples are available.
7-16
OPERATION GUIDE
Status / Job Cancel
Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control devices depending on their status.
Displaying Device/Communication Screen

The procedure for using the Device/Communication screen is explained below.
1 2
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Press [Device/Communication] The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed.
Check of Device Status

Status Scanner Ready. Printer Ready. Removable Memory Not connected. Format FAX Port 1 Dialing... Line Off FAX Printing Jobs
Status
Hard Disk Overwriting...
Remove FAX Port 2 Receiving... Manual RX Log Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Line Off i-FAX Device/ Communication Check New FAX Paper/Supplies
10/10/2008 10:10
The items you can check are described below. Scanner The status of an original scanning in the document processor (optional) or the error information (paper jam, opened cover, etc.) is displayed. Printer Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or printing are displayed. Hard Disk The information such as formatting, overwriting for erasure, and error occurrence is displayed.
OPERATION GUIDE
7-17
Status / Job Cancel
Configuring the Devices

Status
10/10/2008 10:10
Detailed information on controlling devices is given below. Removable Memory (USB Memory) The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed. Press [Format] to format external media. Press [Remove] to safely remove the external media. For details, refer to Removing the USB Memory in the next section.
FAX Port 1, FAX Port 2 The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed. Press [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving. For details, refer to Canceling FAX Communication on page 7-19 in the section afterwards. Press [Manual RX] to start a fax. Use this function when you want to talk to the sender before receiving the fax originals. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit. Press [Log] to display the fax transmission history. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit.
Removing the USB Memory

There is a way to remove the USB memory safely. Use the procedure below to remove the USB memory.
1
Status
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Press [Device/Communication] > [Remove] in Removable Memory.
2
10/10/2008 10:10
7-18
OPERATION GUIDE
Status / Job Cancel
3 Canceling FAX Communication

Cancel fax communication. Use the procedure below to cancel the fax communication.
When Device can be removed safely. is displayed, remove the USB memory.
1
Status
Press the Status/Job Cancel key. Press [Device/Communication] > [Line Off] in FAX Port 1 or FAX Port 2.
2
10/10/2008 10:10
7
3
Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The line is disconnected, and the fax communication is canceled.
OPERATION GUIDE
7-19
Status / Job Cancel
7-20
OPERATION GUIDE
8 Default Setting (System Menu)

This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel. Common Settings .........................................................8-2 Copy Settings..............................................................8-32 Sending Settings.........................................................8-37 Document Box/Removable Memory Settings .............8-40 Printer Settings ...........................................................8-43 Printing Reports/Sending Notice.................................8-49 Adjustment/Maintenance ............................................8-52 Date/Timer ..................................................................8-64 Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys)...8-69 Internet Browser Setup ...............................................8-78 Applications.................................................................8-81 System Initialization ....................................................8-85 Restarting the System.................................................8-86 Network Setup ............................................................8-87 Network Security.........................................................8-95 Interface Block Setting ................................................8-98 Security Level (Security Level setting)......................8-100 Document Guard Setting ..........................................8-100 Optional Functions ....................................................8-102
OPERATION GUIDE
8-1
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings
Common settings include; Switching the Language for Display [Language] 8-2 Default Screen 8-3 Sound 8-4 Original/Paper Settings 8-5 Switching Unit of Measurement 8-16 Error Handling 8-16 Paper Output 8-18 Orientation Confirmation 8-19 Function Defaults 8-20
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.
Switching the Language for Display [Language]

Select the language displayed on the touch panel. Use the procedure below to select the language.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Language. Press the key for the language you want to use.
Common Settings - Language Set the language to use for the touch panel display.
English Nederlands
Deutsch
Franais Portugus
Espaol
Italiano
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [OK]. The touch panel language will be changed.
8-2
OPERATION GUIDE
Default Screen
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The options are as follows. The table below lists the available screens. Item Copy Send Status Description The Copy screen (the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed) appears. The Send screen (the screen shown when the Send key is pressed) appears. The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown when the Status/Job Cancel key is pressed) appears. The Document Box screen (the screen shown when the Document Box key is pressed) appears. The Program screen (the screen shown when the Program key is pressed) appears. The Application screen (the screen shown when the Application key is pressed) appears.
Document Box
Program Application
Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Default Screen. Select the screen to be displayed as the default screen.
Common Settings - Default Screen Set the default screen to be displayed when main power switch is turned on.
Copy Application
English Send
Status
Document Box
Program
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-3
Sound
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details. Item Volume Key Confirmation Job Finish Ready Warning Value 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum) to 5 (Maximum) Off, On Description Set the buzzer volume level. Emit a sound when the control panel and touch panel keys are pressed. Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed. Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed. Emit a sound when errors occur.
Off, On Off, On Off, On
Use the procedure below to set the sound options.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Sound and then [Next] of Buzzer. Press [Change] of Volume, Key Confirmation, Job Finish, Ready, or Warning. Select the buzzer volume level, or other sound options.
8-4
OPERATION GUIDE
Original/Paper Settings
Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper. Custom Original Size Setup Set up frequently-used custom original sizes. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select original size. The dimensions available are as follows. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Input units Inch models Metric models Dimensions X: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments) Y: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments) X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments) Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Up to four custom original sizes can be added. Use the procedure below to set a custom original size.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Original Size. Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4, on which you wish to register the size. Press [On], and then press [+],[] or numeric keys to enter X(horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions. Press [OK].
3 4 5
OPERATION GUIDE
8-5
Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print Set up a maximum of four frequently-used custom paper sizes. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray. The table below lists the sizes that can be registered. Input units Inch models Metric models Dimensions H: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments) V: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments) H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments) V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Up to four custom paper sizes can be added. Select media type for each paper size. Media type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock,Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8
NOTE: Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-11 for Custom 1-8 for media type.
Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Paper Size. Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4, on which you want to register the size. Press [On], and then press [+],[] or numeric keys to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions. Press [Media Type] to select the type of paper and press [OK] if necessary. Press [OK].
3 4 5 6
8-6
OPERATION GUIDE
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1, 2 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 3 and 4). The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below. Item Paper Size Auto Standard Sizes 1 Description Automatically detect paper size. Select Metric or Inch for paper size. Available options are as follows: Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.513.5", Oficio II Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1. Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B5, B5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.513.5", Oficio II, 8K, 16K, 16K-R Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Rough, Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Recycled, Preprint**, Bond*, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Thick (106 g/m2 and more)*, High Quality, Custom 1-8*
Standard Sizes 2
Media Type
**
To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-11. When the paper weight settings shown below are selected, the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected. Bond: Heavy 3 Thick: Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy Custom 1 to 8: Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-15.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-7
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [Next] of Cassette Setting, [Next] of Cassette 1 to Cassette 4, on which you want to register the size, and then [Change] of Paper Size. To detect paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size. To select paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1] or [Standard Sizes 2] for Paper Size.
4 5
Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears. Press [Change] of Media Type to select media type and press [OK].
8-8
OPERATION GUIDE
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray Select size and media type for multi purpose tray. Set up frequently-used size and media type before use. The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
Item Paper Size Auto Standard Sizes 1
Description Automatically detect paper size. Select Metric or Inch for paper size. Available options are as follows: Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.513.5", Oficio II, Executive Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1. Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.513.5", Oficio II, Executive, 8K, 16K, 16K-R Select special standard sizes or custom sizes*. ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes. Inch models: H: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments) V: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments) Metric models: V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments) H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments) Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprint**, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Envelope, Thick (106 g/m2 and more), Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8**
Standard Sizes 2
Others
Size Entry
Media Type
* **
Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-6 for selecting Custom 1- 4 for Custom Paper Size. Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-11 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from Media Type. To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-15.
NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-11
OPERATION GUIDE
8-9
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [Next] of MP Tray Setting and then [Change] of Paper Size. To detect paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size. To select paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size Entry] for Paper Size. If you select [Size Entry], press [+], [] to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions. Press [# keys] to enter the paper size using the numeric keys.
4 5
Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears. Press [Change] of Media Type to select the media type and press [OK].
8-10
OPERATION GUIDE
Paper Weight Select weight for each media type. The options for media type and weight of paper are as follows. Paper types and weights : Available : Not available
Paper Weight Weight (g/m2), Light 64g/m2 or less Normal 1 60g/m2 to 75g/m2 Normal 2 76g/m2 to 90g/m2 Normal 3 91g/m2 to 105g/m2 ** Heavy 1 106g/m2 to 128g/m2 Heavy 2 129g/m2 to 163g/m2 Heavy 3 164g/m2 and more * * Extra Heavy Transparencies ** * *
Media type
Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color Prepunched Letterhead Thick Envelope Coated High Quality Custom 1-8 * **
You cannot select the paper weight if the media types have already been set for cassettes 1 to 4 in Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes (page 8-7). When Normal 3 is selected with the machine that installs the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher, the maximum sheets for stapling becomes 40 sheets for A4 or less sized paper.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-11
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed. Item Duplex Prohibit Permit Name Description Duplex printing not allowed. Duplex printing allowed. Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 15 characters. Selecting media type at multi purpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.
Use the procedure below to set the paper weight.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Media Type Setting. Press [Next] for the media type whose weight you want to change. Press [Change] of Paper Weight. Select the weight and press [OK]. Press [Close]. The previous screen reappears.
3 4 5 6
To change the duplex printing settings for Custom 1 (-8), press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change] of Duplex. Select [Prohibit] or [Permit] and press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
8 9
Press [Close]. To change the name for Custom 1(-8), press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change] of Name. Enter the name and press [OK].

8-12
OPERATION GUIDE
Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-4 and Multi Purpose Tray.
NOTE: [Cassette 3] is displayed when either of the optional paper feeder or 3,000 sheet paper feeder is
installed, and [Cassette 4] is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed. Use the procedure below to select the default paper source.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Default Paper Source. Select a paper cassette for the default setting. Press [OK].
3 4
Automatic Detection of Originals (Available for metric models only) Automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size. The table below lists the special or non-standard original sizes. Item A6/Hagaki Folio 11x15" Description As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size, select either one of them for automatic detection. Select Folio for automatic detection. Select the 1115" size for automatic detection.
Use the procedure below to set automatic detection of originals.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Original Auto Detect. Select [A6] or [Hagaki] of A6/Hagaki. Select [Off] to disable automatic detection or [On] to enable automatic detection of Folio and 11x15" respectively.
Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-13
Media for Auto Selection (Color/B&W) Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection. If Plain is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size.
NOTE: Default media types can be set for both Color and Black and White.
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Media for Auto (Color) or Media for Auto (B & W). Select [All Media Types] or any media type for paper selection. Press [OK].
3 4
Paper Source for Cover Paper
Select paper source for cover paper from Cassette 1-4 or Multi Purpose Tray. Cover is used for Booklet (see page 4-29) and Cover (see page 4-32) modes.
NOTE: [Cassette 3] is displayed when either of the optional paper feeder or 3,000 sheet paper feeder is
installed, and [Cassette 4] is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed. Use the procedure below to select the paper source for the cover.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [ ] and then [Change] of Paper Source for Cover. Select the paper source to load cover paper. Press [OK].
3 4
8-14
OPERATION GUIDE
Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority]. The table below lists the available settings and their details. Item Adjust Print Direction Description Adjust print direction. Print speed is a little slower. Select this item to print on Prepunched, Preprint and Letterhead. Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation. Select this item when paper orientation is not important.
Speed Priority
If you select [Adjust Print Direction], load paper according to the steps below. Example: copying on Letterhead
Original
Paper
Finished
Cassette
Multi Purpose Tray
Original
Paper
Finished
Cassette
Multi Purpose Tray
NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray, load the face, on which printing is
supposed to be done, upward. Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [ ] and then [Change] of Special Paper Action. Select [Adjust Print Direction] or [Speed Priority]. Press [OK].
3 4
OPERATION GUIDE
8-15
Switching Unit of Measurement

Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. Use the procedure below to change the input units.
1 2 3 4 Error Handling
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Measurement. Select [mm] for metric or [inch] for inch. Press [OK].
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. The possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows. Duplexing Error Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type. Item 1-sided Display Error Description Printed in 1-sided Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Finishing Error Select alternative actions when finishing (stapling or offsetting) is not available for the selected paper size or media type. Processing Ignore Display Error Description The setting is ignored and the job is printed. Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
8-16
OPERATION GUIDE
No Staple Error Select what to do when staples run out during printing. Item Ignore Display Error Description Printing continues without stapling. Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher is
installed. Stapling Limit Error Select what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing. Item Ignore Display Error Description Printing continues without stapling. Error message to cancel printing is displayed
NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher is
installed. Punch Waste Full Error Select what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing. Item Ignore Display Error Description Printing continues without punching. Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher and punch unit are
installed.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-17
Paper Mismatch Error Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer. Item Ignore Display Error Description The setting is ignored and the job is printed. Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling.
1 2 3 4 5 Paper Output
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Error Handling. Press [Change] at the error you wish to change the handling. Select the error handling method in the selection screen for each of the errors and then press [OK]. The previous screen appears. To set the handling for a different error, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Select output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Custom Box, computers, and FAX RX data. The options are as follows. Output Tray Top Tray Tray A, Tray B*, Tray C* Finisher Tray* Job Separator Tray 1 to 7*
*
Descriptions Delivery on Top Tray of the machine. Delivery to trays A to C in the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher. Delivery on Tray set to the optional document finisher. Delivery on the optional job separator. Delivery to trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox (tray 1 is the top tray).
Select [Face Up] (print surface up) or [Face Down] (print surface down) for paper orientation at output.
NOTE: Optional job separator, and document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher are required.
FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional fax kit is installed.
8-18
OPERATION GUIDE
Use the procedure below to select the output tray.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Paper Output. Press [Change] of Copy/Custom Box, Printer, or FAX. Select Output Tray. For [Finisher Tray], [Tray B], [Tray C] or [Tray 1] to [Tray 7], select [Face Up] (print surface up) or [Face Down] (print surface down) as the paper orientation at output.
5 Orientation Confirmation
Press [OK].
Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be placed on the platen when using the following functions. (For more information, refer to page 4-11 for Original Orientation.) Duplex Margin/Centering originals Border erase Combine mode Memo mode Page numbering Booklets Staple/Punch (optional feature)
Orientation Confirmation Setting Use the procedure below to select the default Orientation Confirmation setting.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings] and [Change] of Orientation Confirmation. Select the default for [Off] or [On]. Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-19
Function Defaults
Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed. Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier. Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults. The available default settings are shown below. Item Top Edge Top Top Edge Left Refer to page 4-11 for Original Orientation. Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen. Description Select the original's top edge at the top. Select the original's top edge at the left.
1 2 3 4
Continuous Scan
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Orientation. Select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left] for the default. Press [OK].
Set the continuous scan defaults. The available default settings are shown below. Item Off On Refer to page 4-11 for Original Orientation. Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning. Description Continuous scan not performed Continuous scan performed
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Continuous Scan. Select [Off] or [On] for the default. Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.
Press [OK].
8-20
OPERATION GUIDE
Original Image Set the default original document type. The available default settings are shown below. Item Text+Photo Photo Print Photo Text Map for OCR Description Text and photos together. For photos taken with a camera. For photos printed in magazines, etc. Only text, no photos. For maps, etc. Image quality suitable for OCR software.
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.
1 2 3 4
Scan Resolution
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Image. Select the [Text+Photo], [Photo], [Print Photo], [Text], [Map] or [for OCR] as the default. Press [OK].
Select the default scanning resolution. The options are 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, 300x300dpi, 200x400dpi Super Fine, 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Normal. Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Scan Resolution. Select the default resolution. Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-21
Color Selection (Copy) Select the default copying color mode setting. The available default settings are shown below. Color mode Auto Color Full Color Black & White Description Automatically recognize whether documents are color or black and white. Scan document in full color. Scan document in black and white.
Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of mode Color Selection(Copy). Select the default color setting. Press [OK].
3 4
Color Selection (Send/Store)
Select the default color mode for scanning documents. The available default settings are shown below. Color mode Auto Color (Color/Gray) Description Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale. Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White. Scan document in full color. Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish. Scan document in black and white. File size is smaller than Full Color or Grayscale.
Auto Color (Color/ B & W)
Full Color Grayscale Black & White
8-22
OPERATION GUIDE
Use the procedure below to select the default color mode.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of mode Color Sel. (Send/Store). Select the default color mode. Press [OK].
3 4
File Format
Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below. File Format PDF TIFF JPEG XPS High Comp. PDF Description Send files in PDF format. Send files in TIFF format. Send files in JPEG format. Send files in XPS format. Send files in High Comp. PDF format (refer to page 5-16).
NOTE: Refer to page 5-14 for file formats.

Use the procedure below to select the default file format.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of File Format. Select the default file format. Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-23
Density Set the default density. The available default settings are shown below.
NOTE: You cannot specify the density if you have selected [Full Color] in Color Selection.
Item Manual (Normal 0) Auto
Description Set to (Normal 0) in the Manual density. Set to Auto density.
Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.
1 2 3 4
Zoom
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Density. Select the default density. Press [OK].
Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. The available default settings are shown below. Item 100% Auto Description Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%). Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match paper size/ sending size.
Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Zoom. Select the default zoom setting. Press [OK].
8-24
OPERATION GUIDE
File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No. can also be set.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-48 and page 5-28 for name entry.
Use the procedure below to set the default file name.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of File Name Entry. Press [File Name] to enter the file name in not more than 32 characters.

4 5
Press [OK]. Press [Date and Time] to add the date/time to the job, or press [Job No.] to add the job number to the job. The added information will be displayed in Additional Info. Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-25
E-mail Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals by E-mail.
NOTE: Refer to Send as E-mail on page 3-30.

Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message body.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ], and then [Change] of E-mail Subject/ Body. Press [Subject] to enter an E-mail subject not more than 60 characters.

4 5 6 7
Press [OK]. Press [Body] to enter an E-mail Body not more than 500 characters. Press [OK]. Check that the entries are correct and press [OK].
8-26
OPERATION GUIDE
Border Erase Default Set the default width to be erased as a border. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set. Input units Inch Metric Range 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments) 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments)
NOTE: Refer to page 4-27 and page 5-26 for Border Erase.
Use the procedure below to set the default border erase width.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Border Erase Default. Press [+] or [] for the Border and Gutter width to erase. You can use the number keypad to enter the number directly.
4
Margin Default
Press [OK].
Set the default margin. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set. Input units Inch Metric Range -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments) -18 mm to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Use the procedure below to set the default margin width.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Margin Default. Use the [+] or [-] to enter the margin widths for Left/ Right and Top/Bottom(-0.75 - +0.75). You can use the number keypad to enter the number directly.
Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-27
Collate/Offset Set the defaults for Collate/Offset. The table below shows the available settings. Item Collate Off On Offset Off Each Set (Each Page) Description Collate not performed. Collate performed. Offset not performed. Offset performed. (If [Off]) is selected of Collate, it is performed [Each Page].)
NOTE: Refer to page 3-19 for Collate/Offset.

Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings.
1 2 3 4
Auto Image Rotation
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Collate/Offset. Select the defaults for Collate and Offset respectively. Press [OK].
Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting. The table below shows the available settings. Item Off On Description No Auto Image Rotation performed. Auto Image Rotation performed.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-43 for Auto Image Rotation.

Use the procedure below to set the default Auto Image Rotation settings.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Auto Image Rotation. Select the default for [Off] or [On]. Press [OK].
3 4
8-28
OPERATION GUIDE
EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings. Item Off On Description No EcoPrint performed. EcoPrint performed.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-14 for EcoPrint.

Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting.
1 2 3 4
PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] twice, and then [Change] of EcoPrint. Select [Off] or [On] for the default. Press [OK].
Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG file quality. Five options are available from 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.).
NOTE: Higher quality will make the stored files larger.

Refer to page 5-14 for file formats. Use the procedure below to select the default file quality setting.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and then [Change] of PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image. Select the default image quality from [1] (Low Quality) to [5] (High Quality). Press [OK].
3 4
OPERATION GUIDE
8-29
High Comp. PDF Image Select the default High Comp. This setting is only displayed when the optional PDF upgrade kit has been used. The table below shows the available settings. Item Compression Ratio Priority Standard Quality Priority Description Compression Ratio is given priority with smaller file size. Standard quality Image quality is given priority with larger file size.
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for highly compressed PDF files.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of High Comp. PDF Image. Select the default for [Compression Ratio Priority], [Standard], or [Quality Priority]. Press [OK].
3 4
Color TIFF Compression Settings
Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine. Use the procedure below to set the JPEG version.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and then [Change] of Color TIFF Compression. Select [TIFF V6] or [TTN2]. Press [OK].
3 4
8-30
OPERATION GUIDE
Repeat Copying Select the Repeat Copy default. The options are as follows. The table below shows the available settings. Item Off On Description No Repeat Copy is performed. Repeat Copy is performed.
NOTE: This setting is not displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed or the Repeat Copy job is
set to 0. Refer to page 4-50 for Repeat Copy. Use the procedure below to set the default Repeat Copy setting.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of Repeat Copy. Select the default for [Off] or [On]. Press [OK].
3 4
OPERATION GUIDE
8-31
Copy Settings
The following settings are available for copying functions. Border Erase for Back Page 8-32 Paper Selection 8-33 Auto Paper Selection 8-33 Auto % Priority 8-34 Reserve Next Priority 8-34 Preset Limit 8-34 Quick Setup Registration 8-35
Border Erase for Back Page

Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet. The table below shows the available settings. Item Same as Front Page Do Not Erase Description Border Erase performed in the same setting as the front page No Border Erase performed on the back page
NOTE: Refer to page 4-27 and page 5-26 for Border Erase.
Use the procedure below to specify the border erase setting for the back of the page.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Copy] and [Change] of Border Erase to Back Page. Press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase]. Press [OK].
8-32
OPERATION GUIDE
Paper Selection
Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available settings. Item Auto Description Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals. Select paper source set by Default Paper Source (refer to page 8-13).
Default Paper Source
Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection.
1 2 3 4 Auto Paper Selection
Press the System Menu key. Press [Copy] and [Change] of Paper Selection. Press [Auto] or [Default Paper Source]. Press [OK].
If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. The table below shows the available settings. Item Most Suitable Size Same as Original Size Description Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original. Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the zoom.
Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto Paper Selection. Press [Most Suitable Size] or [Same as Original Size]. Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-33
Auto % Priority
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/ zoom) is performed. The table below shows the available settings. Item Off On Description No zoom performed (copied in original size). Automatic zoom performed as appropriate.
Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority.
1 2 3 4 Reserve Next Priority
Press the System Menu key. Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto % Priority. Select the default for [Off] or [On]. Press [OK].
Select the operation of the reserve copy and interrupt copy functions and for canceling jobs. Use the procedure below to select the default Reserve Next Priority setting.
1 2 3 4 Preset Limit
Press the System Menu key. Press [Copy] and [Change] of Reserve Next Priority. Select the default for [Off] or [On]. Press [OK].
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies. Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Copy] and [Change] of Preset Limit. Press [+] or [] or use the numeric keys to enter the limit for the number of copies. Press [OK].
8-34
OPERATION GUIDE
Quick Setup Registration

Select the copying functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary. Six items from the following options are available. Paper Selection Zoom Staple/Punch Density Duplex Combine Collate/Offset Original Image Original Size Original Orientation Color Selection Continuous Scan
NOTE: Refer to Quick Setup Screen on page 3-47 for the Quick Setup steps.
Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.
1 2 3
Change Zoom: Key 2 Change Density: Key 3 Change Combine: Key 5 Change Original Image: Off Change 1/2 Change Change Change Change
Press the System Menu key. Press [Copy] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration. Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.
Copy - Quick Setup Registration Paper Selection: Key 1 Staple/Punch: Key 6 Duplex: Key 4 Collate/Offset: Off Original Size: Off
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
OPERATION GUIDE
8-35
Copy - Paper Selection Register Paper Selection function on the Quick Setup screen.
Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the Quick Setup.
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].
8-36
OPERATION GUIDE
Sending Settings
The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options. Quick Setup Registration 8-37 Color Type 8-38

Select the sending functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary. Six items in the following options are available. Original Size 2-sided/Book Original Sending Size Original Orientation File Format Density Original Image Scan Resolution FAX TX Resolution Color Selection Zoom Continuous Scan
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Send] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration. Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-37
Send - Original Size Register Original Size function on the Quick Setup screen.
Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the Quick Setup.
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 Color Type
Set the color type when you send color documents. The table below shows the available settings. Item RGB sRGB Allows you to match the color space for machines that support sRGB. Description
Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine. Use the procedure below to set the color type.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Send] and then [Change] of Color Type. Select [RGB] or [sRGB]. Press [OK].
8-38
OPERATION GUIDE
Setting the Default Send Screen

Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key. The table below shows the available settings. Item Destination Address Book Detail Displays the destination screen when the Send key is pressed (screen for sending). Displays the address book when the Send key is pressed
Use the procedure below to set the default send screen.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Send] and then [Change] of Default Screen. Press [Destination] or [Address Book]. Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-39
Document Box/Removable Memory Settings

The following settings are available for Document Box and removable USB memory. Registering / Editing Box 8-40 Default Setting 8-40 Job Box 8-40 Removable Memory (JPEG Print) 8-40 Quick Setup Registration 8-41
Registering / Editing Box

Creates a new box, edits a box, or checks details of a box in the custom box, or deletes a box from the custom box. For details, refer to Using a Custom Box on page 6-2.
Default Setting
Sets the time at which documents in the custom box are automatically deleted. For details, refer to Setting the document deletion time on page 6-3.
Job Box
The following three operations can be done. For details, refer to each page shown below. Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print Box (page 6-11) Repeat Copy Box (page 6-14)
Removable Memory (JPEG Print)

Sets the image size when you print JPEG files from USB memory. Use the procedure below to print JPEG files.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next] of Removable Memory and then [Change] of JPEG Print. Select [Fit to Paper Size], [Image Resolution] or [Fit to Print Resolution]. Press [OK].
3 4
8-40
OPERATION GUIDE

Select the Storing in Box, and Printing from Box functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary. The options are as follows. Store File Quick Setup Color Selection Storing Size Density 2-sided/Book Original Resolution Zoom Original Orientation Original Size Original Image Continuous Scan
Print Quick Setup Paper Selection Collate/Offset Staple/Punch Duplex Combine Delete After Printed
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration. Press [Next] of Store File or Send. Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-41
Document Box/Removable Memory - Color Register Color Selection function on the Quick Setup screen.
Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the Quick Setup.
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
8-42
OPERATION GUIDE
Printer Settings
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine. Emulation 8-43 Color Setting 8-44 EcoPrint 8-45 Override A4/Letter 8-45 Duplex 8-46 Copies 8-46 Orientation 8-47 Form Feed Timeout 8-47 LF Action 8-48 CR Action 8-48
Emulation
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers. Selection of emulation The printer can emulate PCL 6, KPDL and KPDL(Auto). Use the procedure below to select the emulation.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu Key. Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation. Select the desired emulation.
NOTE: If you selected [KPDL(Auto)], set Alternative Emulation, too. (Refer to page 8-44)
When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], set KPDL Error Report, too. (Refer to page 8-44)
Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-43
Setting of Alternative Emulation When you have selected [KPDL(Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between KPDL and another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to the data to print. The alternative emulation you can set is [PCL6]. Use the procedure below to select the alternative emulation.
1 2 3 4
Setting of KPDL error report
Press the System Menu Key. Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation > [KPDL(Auto)] > [Alt Emulation]. Select the desired alternative emulation and then press [OK]. Press [OK].
When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the error report is output. The default setting is Off (not output). Use the procedure below to specify the KPDL error report setting.
1 2 3 4 Color Setting
Press the System Menu Key. Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation > [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)] > [KPDL Error Report]. Press [On] or [Off] and then press [OK]. Press [OK].
You can choose whether status reports are printed in color or black and white. Use the procedure below to select the color setting.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Printer] and then [Change] of Color Setting. Select [Color] or [Black & White]. Press [OK].
8-44
OPERATION GUIDE
EcoPrint
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem. Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting.
1 2 3 4 Override A4/Letter
Press the System Menu key. Press [Printer] and [Change] of EcoPrint. Press [Off] or [On]. Press [OK].
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. The table below shows the available settings. Item On Description A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source. A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
Off
Use the procedure below to specify the override A4/Letter setting.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Printer] and [Change] of Override A4/Letter. Press [Off] or [On]. Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-45
Duplex
Select binding orientation for duplex mode. The table below shows the available settings. Item 1-sided 2-sided Bind ShortEdge Description No duplex mode Shorter edge bound Finish
2-sided Bind LongEdge
Longer edge bound
Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Printer] and [Change] of Duplex. Press [1-sided], [2-sided Bind LongEdge], or [2-sided Bind ShortEdge]. Press [OK].
4 Copies
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.
Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Printer] and [Change] of Copies. Press [+],[] or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies. Press [OK].
8-46
OPERATION GUIDE
Orientation
Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape.
Portrait Printer
Landscape Printer
Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing.
1 2 3 4 Form Feed Timeout
Press the System Menu key. Press [Printer] and [Change] of Orientation. Press [Portrait] or [Landscape]. Press [OK].
Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signalling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds. Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Printer], [ Timeout. ] and [Change] of Form Feed
Press [+] or [] to set the Form Feed Timeout. You can set the timeout delay in seconds. You cannot use the number keypad to enter this value.
Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-47
LF Action
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH). The table below shows the available settings. Item LF Only LF and CR Ignore LF Description Only line feed performed. Line feed and character return performed. No line feed performed.
Use the procedure below to specify a LF action.
1 2 3 4 CR Action
Press the System Menu key. Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of LF Action.
Press [LF Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore LF]. Press [OK].
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). The table below shows the available settings. Item CR Only LF and CR Ignore CR Description Only character return performed. Character return and line feed performed. No character return performed.
Use the procedure below to specify a CR action.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of CR Action.
Press [CR Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore CR]. Press [OK].
8-48
OPERATION GUIDE
Printing Reports/Sending Notice

Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges.
Printing Reports
Printable reports are as follows. Status Page Check the information including current settings, available memory space, and optional equipment installed.
Status Page
TASKalfa 500ci
Firmware Version
Font List Check the font samples installed in the machine.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-49
Network Status Page Check the information including network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.
Network Status Page

TASKalfa 500ci
Firmware Version
Service Status Page More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose. Use the procedure below to print a report.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Report] and [Next] of Print Report. Press [Print] for the report you want to print. Printing starts. A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].
8-50
OPERATION GUIDE
Send Result Report

Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The table below shows the available settings. Item Off On Error Only Description No result report printed. Result report automatically printed. Transmitted images can also be attached. Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error. If two or more destinations are registered, the reports are printed only for the destinations with the errors. Transmitted images can also be attached.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [Report], [Next] of Result Report Setting, [Next] of Send Result Report and then [Change] of E-mail/Folder. Press [Off], [On], or [Error Only]. Press [OK].
3 4
OPERATION GUIDE
8-51
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. Copy Density Adjustment 8-52 Send/Box Density Adjust 8-53 Print Density 8-53 Drum Refresh 8-53 Correcting Fine Black Lines 8-54 System Initialization 8-55 Display Brightness 8-55 Silent Mode 8-55 Auto Color Correction...8-56 Color Registration...8-56 Setting the Color Calibration Cycle...8-60 Gray Adjustment...8-60 Color Calibration...8-62 Developer Refresh...8-63 Laser Scanner Cleaning...8-63
Copy Density Adjustment

Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes. Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density.
1 2 3 4 5
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and [Next] of Copy Density Adjustment. Press [Change] of Auto or of Manual. Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density. Press [OK].
8-52
OPERATION GUIDE
Send/Box Density Adjust

Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes.
1 2 3 4 5 Print Density
Adjust print density. Adjustment can be made in 5 levels. Use the procedure below to adjust the print density.
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and [Next] of Send/Box Density Adjust.. Press [Change] of Auto or of Manual. Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density. Press [OK].
1 2 3 4 Drum Refresh
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and [Change] of Print Density. Press [1] - [5] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density. Press [OK].
Refresh the drum when image blur or white spots appear on images in copies.
CAUTION: Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.
Use the procedure below to refresh the drum.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance].
Press [Next] of Drum Refresh.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-53
Adjustment / Maintenance - Drum Refresh Clear image blur or white dots appear on the image.
Press [Execute] to Drum Refresh.
Cancel
Status
Execute
10/10/2008 10:10
5 Correcting Fine Black Lines
After Drum Refresh is completed, press [OK] to return to the Adjustment/Maintenance screen.
Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the copies, when the optional document processor used.
Paper feed direction
The table below shows the available settings. Item Off On(Low) On(High) Description No correction performed. Correction performed. The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using Off. Correction performed. Select this item if black streak remains after using On (Low). The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using On (Low).
NOTE: Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters. It is recommended to
keep the default ([Off]).
8-54
OPERATION GUIDE
Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines.
1 2 3 4 System Initialization
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and [Change] of Correcting Black Line. Press [Off], [On(Low)] or [On(High)]. Press [OK].
Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode. Refer to System Initialization on page 8-85 about the initialization procedures.
Display Brightness
Set the brightness of the touch panel. Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness.
1 2 3 4 Silent Mode
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and [Change] of Display Brightness. Press [1] - [4] (Darker- Lighter) to adjust brightness. Press [OK].
Make the machine run more quietly. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable. Use the procedure below to set Silent mode.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and [Change] of Silent Mode. Press [Off] or [On]. Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-55
Auto Color Correction

This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode. Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white. Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level.
1 2 3 4 Color Registration
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [ [Change] of Auto Color Correction. ]>
Press one of keys [1] to [5] (Color - B & W) to set the detection level. Press [OK].
When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift. Normal registration and detailed settings are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected through normal registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the detailed settings.
NOTE: To perform color registration, verify that either 11 8 1/2" or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette. Normal Registration
Follow the steps below to correct normal color drift.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ then [Next] of Color Registration. Press [Print] of Chart. A chart is printed. On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), 3 chart types are printed on one sheet: H-F (left), V (right), H-R (horizontal). ] and
8-56
OPERATION GUIDE
Chart Example
8
4
Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely overlap each other. If this is the 0 position, registration for that color is not required. For the illustration, B is the appropriate value.
5 6 7
Press [Next] of Registration. Press [Change] for the chart to be corrected. Press [+] or [-] to enter the values read from the chart and press [OK]. Press [+] to increase the value from 0 to 9. To decrease, press [-]. By pressing [-], the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the reverse direction, press [+]. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-57
8 9
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the registration values for each chart. Press [Execute] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins.
10 Press [OK] after color registration is complete.

Detailed Settings Follow the steps below to perform more detailed correction.
1 2 3
Refer to Steps 1-2 of Normal Registration to display the Color Registration screen. Press [Detail]. Press [Print] of Chart (Details). A chart is printed. On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), charts for H-1 to 7 and V-3 are printed.
Chart Example
8-58
OPERATION GUIDE
Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match. If this is the 0 position, registration for that color is not required. For the illustration, B is the appropriate value. From charts V-1 to V-5, read only the values from V-3 (center).
5 6 7
Press [Next] of Registration (Details). Press [Change] for the chart to be corrected. Press [+] or [-] to enter the values read from the chart and press [OK]. Press [+] to increase the value from 0 to 9. To decrease, press [-]. By pressing [-], the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the reverse direction, press [+]. You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.
8 9
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the registration values for each chart. Press [Execute] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins.
10 Press [OK] after color registration is complete.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-59
Setting the Color Calibration Cycle

After Auto Clear has been activated, or during printing or while processing Color Registration, Performing Color Calibration... Remaining: 50 seconds may be displayed. While this message is displayed, the machine makes adjustments to maintain image quality. Wait until the message disappears. Set the color calibration cycle here. The setting items are as follows. Item Auto Short Description Automatically sets the cycle for color calibration. Sets a short color calibration cycle and increases the number of times performed, with priority to image quality. Sets a standard color calibration cycle, compromising between image quality and downtime for processing. Sets a long color calibration cycle and decreases the number of times performed, to ensure minimal downtime.
Standard
Long
1 2 3 4
Gray Adjustment
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Change] of Color Calibration Cycle. Select [Auto], [Short], [Standard] or [Long]. Press [OK].
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of printed color output may shift or color drift may occur. Use this function to correct color settings when the color of a finished copy does not match the original. Perform color calibration before using gray adjustment (see page 8-60). Use gray adjustment when the color is not enhanced even after performing color calibration. Normal and detailed gray adjustment is available. While normal adjustment will almost completely eliminate errors in color tones, you can also use detailed adjustment for stubborn color tone problems or where more precise adjustment is needed.
NOTE: To perform gray adjustment, verify that either 11 8 1/2" or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.
Normal adjustment
Use the procedure below for normal adjustment.
8-60
OPERATION GUIDE
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ then [Next] of Gray Adjustment. ] and
Press [Execute]. A color pattern is printed. Check that the number "1" and one magenta box are printed in the top right corner of the color pattern. As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the three black boxes aligned to the top.
5 6
Press the Start key. The color pattern is read and adjustment begins. The second color pattern is output. Check that the number "2" and two magenta boxes are printed in the top right corner of the color pattern and then repeat steps 4 and 5.
IMPORTANT: Always check the number of magenta boxes and the number printed in the top right corner of the color pattern before placing it on the platen. Do not mistake the first and second color patterns.
7 Detailed Adjustment
Press [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.
A total of 4 color pattern pages (No. 1 to 4) are printed during detailed adjustment. As with normal adjustment (page 8-60), the printed color patterns are read sequentially during detailed adjustment. IMPORTANT: The numbers 1 to 4 and a corresponding number of magenta boxes are printed at the top right of each of the printed color pattern. Always check the number of magenta boxes and the printed number before placing each color pattern on the platen. Use the procedure below to carry out detailed adjustment.
1 2 3
Refer to steps 1 to 2 in normal adjustment to display the Gray Adjustment screen. Press [Detail]. Press [Execute]. A color pattern is printed.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-61
Check that the number "1" and one magenta box are printed in the top right corner of the color pattern.
As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the three black boxes aligned to the top.
5 6
Press the Start key. The color pattern is read and adjustment begins. The second color pattern is printed. Check that the number "2" (to "4") and two (to four) magenta boxes are printed in the top right corner of the color pattern and repeat steps 4 to 6 three times to read color patterns 2, 3 and 4 in sequence.
7
Color Calibration
Press [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of printed color output may shift or color drift may occur. Using this function enables printing in the most appropriate color by adjusting hue and color drift in detail. Use gray adjustment when the color is not enhanced even after performing color calibration (see page 8-60). If the hue and color are not enhanced, use color registration (see page 8-56).
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ then [Next] of Color Calibration. Press [Execute]. Color calibration begins. Press [OK] after color calibration is complete. ] and
8-62
OPERATION GUIDE
Developer Refresh
When the printing is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner, refresh the developer.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ then [Next] of Developer Refresh. ] and
Press [Execute]. Developer refresh begins.
NOTE: Waiting time may be longer when the toner is

refilled during developer refresh.
4
Laser Scanner Cleaning
Press [OK] after developer refresh is complete.
If white or color streaks appear on images, perform Laser Scanner Cleaning.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ then [Next] of Laser Scanner Cleaning. ] and
Press [Execute]. Laser scanner cleaning begins. Press [OK] after laser scanner cleaning is complete.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-63
Date/Timer
Date/Timer settings include: Date/Time 8-64 Date Format 8-65 Time Zone 8-65 Auto Panel Reset 8-65 Low Power Timer 8-66 Auto Sleep 8-67 Auto Error Clear 8-67 Interrupt Clear Timer 8-68
Date/Time
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.
CAUTION: Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date/Time setup.

Use the procedure below to set the date and time.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date/Time. Press [+] or [] to enter the date and time respectively.
NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial application (page 8-102) is running, the If you change Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. Are you sure? message is displayed. To change the date/time, press [Yes].
8-64
OPERATION GUIDE
Date Format
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation. Use the procedure below to select the date format.
1 2 3 Time Zone
Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT. Use the procedure below to set the time difference.
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date Format. Select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or [YYYY/ MM/DD] and press [OK].
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [ Zone. ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Time
Select the location. ] or [ ] to select the location.
NOTE: Press [
Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].
NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will not appear.
Auto Panel Reset

If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting.
NOTE: Refer to page 8-20 for the default settings.

Auto Panel Reset ON/OFF Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not. Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Panel Reset.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-65
3 4
Panel Reset Timer
Press [Off] or [On]. Press [OK].
If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset. Options are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds).
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the reset time.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Panel Reset Timer. Press [+] or [] to enter the time until Auto Panel Reset is turned on. You cannot use the number keypad to enter this value.
4 Low Power Timer
Press [OK].
You can specify the amount of time to wait before Low Power Mode. Specify a value from 1 - 240 minutes (1 minute increments). For more information on Low Power Mode, refer to the Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 3-4. Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Mode.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [ Timer]. ], [Date/Timer] and then [Low Power
Press [+],[] or the numeric keys to enter the time until Low Power Mode is turned on. Press [OK].
8-66
OPERATION GUIDE
Auto Sleep
If no job runs for a certain period of time, automatically enter Sleep Mode. Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 3-5 for Sleep Mode. Auto Sleep ON/OFF Select whether to use Auto Sleep or not.
NOTE: Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary.

Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting.
1 2 3 4
Sleep Timer
Press the System Menu key. Press [ Sleep. ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto
Press [Off] or [On]. Press [OK].
If you select [On] for Auto Sleep, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep. Options are between 1 and 240 minutes (every one minute).
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Sleep, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time.
1 2 3 4 Auto Error Clear
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Sleep Timer. Press [+] and [] or the numeric keys to enter the time until Auto Sleep is turned on. Press [OK].
If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses. The following errors are automatically cleared. Print overrun Memory is full
OPERATION GUIDE
8-67
Auto Error Clear ON/OFF Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not. Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting.
1 2 3 4
Error Clear Timer
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Error Clear. Press [Off] or [On]. Press [OK].
If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors. Options are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds). If you set 0 as the time, errors are not displayed.
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Date/Timer], [ Error Clear Timer. ] and then [Change] of
Press [+] or [] to enter the time until printing restarts. You cannot use the number keypad to enter this value.
4 Interrupt Clear Timer
Press [OK].
Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused. Any period between 5 and 459 seconds (in five-second increments) can be set. The procedure for setting the interrupt clear timer is explained below.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Date/Timer], [ Interrupt Clear Timer. ] and then [Change] of
Press [+] or [-] to enter the time for the interrupt clear timer. Press [OK].
8-68
OPERATION GUIDE
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys)

Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (optional).
Adding a Destination
Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, individuals and groups. When adding a group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in
with administrator privileges. Adding an individual A maximum of 2,000 individual addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (optional). Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact.
1 2 3
Name E-mail SMB FTP FAX i-FAX : : 0033 Mike Change Change
Press the System Menu key. Press [Edit Destination], [Register/Edit] of Address Book, [Add], [Contact] and then [Next]. To specify the address number, press [Change] in Address Number.
Address:
Address Number Name
Cancel
Status
Back
Register
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [+],[] or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number (1-2500). To have the number assigned automatically, enter 0000.
NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 2,500 numbers for individuals and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you press [Register] and the number cannot be registered. If you set 0000 as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-69
5 6 7
Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3 reappears. Press [Change] of Name. Enter the destination name (up to 32 characters) to be displayed on the Address Book and press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3 reappears.

Press [E-mail] to add an e-mail address, [SMB] to add a folder on the computer, or [FTP] to add an FTP folder. The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.
E-mail Address
Address: Name E-mail SMB FTP FAX i-FAX
1
: abcd@wxyz.co.com Change
E-mail Address
Press [Change] of E-mail Address, enter the E-mail address and press [OK]. The table below explains the items to be entered.

Cancel
Status
Back
Register
10/10/2008 10:10
The Folder (FTP) Address 1 Press [Change] of Host Name, Path, Login User Name and Login Password, enter the information for each item and press [OK].
The table below explains the items to be entered. Max. No. of Characters 64 chars 128 chars
Item Host name* Path
Description FTP server host name or IP address Path for the file to be stored E.g. "\User\ScanData" If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory. User name FTP server login
Login user name
64 chars
8-70
OPERATION GUIDE
Item Login password

*
Description Password for FTP server login
Max. No. of Characters 64 chars
If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Host name: port number" format. (E.g. FTPhostname:140)
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the FTP server you chose. If the connection fails, check the entries you made.
The Folder (SMB) Address 1 Press [Change] of Host Name, Path, Login User Name and Login Password, enter the information for each item and press [OK].
The table below explains the items to be entered. Max. No. of Characters 64 chars 128 chars
Description Host name or IP address of the sending computer Path to the folder used to save files E.g. \User\ScanData User name for folder access For example, abcdnet\james.smith Password for folder access

*
64 chars
64 chars
If you specify a port number other than the default (139), use the Host name: port number format. (E.g. SMBhostname:140)
OPERATION GUIDE
8-71
Address: SMB Name E-mail SMB FTP FAX i-FAX
Host Name Path Login User Name Login Password
: : : : **********
Change Change Change Change
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on entering characters. Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the computer you chose. If the connection fails, check the entries you made.
Connection Test
Cancel
Status
Back
Register
10/10/2008 10:10
Check if the destination entry is correct and press [Register]. The destination is added to the Address Book.
Adding a Group Compile two or more individuals into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book.
NOTE: Before adding a group in the Address Book, the individuals to be included in the group must be added first. Up to 100 destinations for the e-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, and the total of 10 destinations for the FTP and SMB can be registered per a group.
Use the procedure below to register a group.
1 2 3
Name Member : : 0022 ABCABC Change Change
Press the System Menu key. Press [Edit Destination], [Register/Edit] of Address Book, [Add], [Group] and then [Next]. To specify the address number, press [Change] in Address Number.
Address:
Address Number Name
Cancel
Status
Back
Register
10/10/2008 10:10
Use [+]/[-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2500). To have the number assigned automatically, set "0000".
8-72
OPERATION GUIDE
NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a group. You can select any available number out of 2,000 numbers for individuals and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you press [Register] and the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.
5 6 7
Press [OK]. The Add Group screen reappears. Press [Change] of Name. Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book not more than 32 characters.

8 9
Address: Name Member:1 dest.
Destination Detail
Press [Member]. Press [Add].
10 Select a destination (individual) to add to the group.

Member
CCC
ABC@DEF.com
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-35 for Address List.
1/1
Detail
Delete
Add
Cancel
Status
Back
Register
10/10/2008 10:10
11 Press [OK]. 12 If you have more destinations to add, repeat Steps

9 to 11. Check if the selected destination was added to the group and press [Register]. Now the group is added to the Address Book.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-73
Editing a Destination
Edit/delete the destinations (invididuals) you added to the Address Book. Use the procedure below to edit a destination.
1 2 3
Sort
No. Type Name Detail
Press the System Menu key. Press [Edit Destination] and then [Register/Edit] of Address Book. Select a destination or group to edit.
Edit Destination - Address Book Name
0001 0002 0003
ABCDE BBBBB CCCCC
Member: 3 Search(Name) BBBBB Search(No.) CCCCC

1/1
Add Detail Delete
ABC
DEF Contact
GHI
JKL
MNO PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
0-9
Group
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Press [Detail]. The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
Editing an Individual Destination 1 Change Address Number, Name and destination type and address. Refer to Adding an individual on page 8-69 for the details. After you have completed the changes, press [Register]. Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed destination.
2 3
Editing a Group 1 2 3 Change Address Number and Name. Refer to Adding a Group on page 8-72 for the details. Press [Member]. To delete any destination from the group, select the destination and press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion. After you have completed the changes, press [Register]. Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed group.
4 5
8-74
OPERATION GUIDE
Deleting an Individual Destination or Group Repeat Steps 1 to 3, press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion. Deletion is performed.
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key

Add a new destination (individual or group). A maximum of 1000 destinations can be registered.
NOTE: Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-35 for use of One Touch Key.
Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One Touch key.
1 2 3
0003 CCC 0007 0008 0009 0010 Register /Edit Delete 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015
1/50
Press the System Menu key. Press [Edit Destination] and [Register/Edit] of Onetouch Key. Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination. Pressing Quick No. Search key or [No.] enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number. Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.
Edit Destination - One Touch Key Register One Touch key.
0001 AAA 0006 BBB
0002
0004
0005
No.
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020 Detail
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4 5
Press [Register/Edit]. The address book appears. Select a destination (individual or group) to add to the One Touch Key number. Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
One Touch Key: Sort

Name
0003 0004 0005
ABC QWE 123
ABC@DEF.com Search(Name) qwe@rty.com 123@456.com

2/3
Search(No.)
Detail
ABC
DEF E-mail
GHI
JKL
MNO PQRS
TUV WXYZ Folder
0-9 i-FAX Group
Folder
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [OK]. The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-75
One Touch KeyEditing One Touch Key Edit/delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key. Use the procedure below to edit the One Touch key.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [Edit Destination] and then [Register/Edit] of One-touch Key. Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination. Pressing Quick No. Search key or [No.] enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number. The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
One Touch KeyChanging the Registered Information

Press [Register/Edit].
0001 AAA 0006 BBB
0002 CCC 0007
0003
0004
0005
No. Register /Edit Delete
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
1/50
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020 Detail
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
One Touch Key: Sort

2
Name
0003 0004 0005
ABC QWE 123
ABC@DEF.com Search(Name) qwe@rty.com 123@456.com

2/3
Select a new destination (individual or group). Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
Search(No.)
Detail
ABC
DEF E-mail
GHI
JKL
MNO PQRS
TUV WXYZ Folder
0-9 i-FAX Group
Folder
10:10
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008
3 4
Press [OK]. Press [Yes] on the screen to add the destination to the One Touch Key.
8-76
OPERATION GUIDE
One Touch KeyDeleting the Registered Information

Press [Delete].
0001 AAA 0006 BBB
0002 CCC 0007
0003
0004
0005
No. Register /Edit Delete
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
1/50
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020 Detail
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key.
Destination Filter Settings This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination listed when the address book is displayed. The table below shows the available settings. Item Off E-mail Folder FAX Group Detail Displays all destination types in the destination list. Displays only e-mail destinations. Displays only folder (SMB or FTP) destinations. Displays only FAX destinations. Displays only groups.
Use the procedure below to specify the Narrow Down settings.
1 2 3 4
Press the System Menu key. Press [Edit Destination], [Next] of Address Book Defaults and then [Change] of Narrow Down. Select the type of destination filter. Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-77
Internet Browser Setup

This procedure sets up the Internet browser application. You can specify the following Internet browser settings. Internet Browser Setting Browser Preferences Proxy Settings
NOTE: To use an Internet browser, you must specify License On for the browser in Applications (page 8-81).
Internet Browser Setting

This selects whether or not the Internet browser is used. Use the procedure below to specify the Internet browser setting.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ] and then [Internet].
NOTE: If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password.
3 4 5 Browser Preferences
Press [Change] of Internet Browser. Press [On] or [Off]. Press [OK].
This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how pages are displayed.
NOTE: This is not displayed if you selected Off in Internet Browser Setting (page 8-78).
Use the procedure below to set your Internet browser preferences.
1 2
8-78
OPERATION GUIDE
3 4
Press [Next] of Browser Environment. To set your home page, press [Change] of Home Page, press [URL], enter the URL and then press [OK]. Press [OK] again.

To set the text size, press [Change] of Text Size, select [Large], [Medium] or [Small] as the text size and then press [OK]. To set the display mode, press [Change] of Display Mode, select [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering] or [Smart-Fit Rendering] as the display mode and then press [OK]. To specify the settings for accepting cookies, press [Change] of Cookie, select [Accept All], [Reject All] or [Prompt before Accepting] as your cookie acceptance policy and then press [OK].
Proxy Settings
Use the procedure below to specify the proxy settings.
1 2
Press [Change] of Proxy and then press [On].
To set a proxy server (HTTP) 1 Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTP), enter the proxy address and press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-79
Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.
To set a proxy server (HTTPS) 1 2 Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTPS), enter the proxy address and press [OK]. Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.
To set domains for which no proxy is used 1 Press [Keyboard] of Do Not Use Proxy for Following Domains, enter the domain name and press [OK].

Press [OK].
8-80
OPERATION GUIDE
Applications
You can install and use applications that will make your day-to-day use of this machine more efficient.
Starting/Exiting Application Use

To use an application, set the application to License On. Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ] and then [Application].
Application Manage the applications.
3
Name Version ------Status Activating Stopped Activating License Official Official Trial
1/1
Select the desired application and press [License On]. You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
Add
Application 1 Application 2 Application 3
Delete
License On License Off Print Report Detail
NOTE: To exit an application, press [License Off].
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
License On Enter the activation code to use the application officially. The activation code is not necessary to use it as a trial.
Enter the license key and press [Official]. Some applications do not require you to enter an license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, go to Step 5. To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without entering the license key.
Activation Code
********
Cancel
Status
Trial
Official
10/10/2008 10:10
When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
IMPORTANT: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the application.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-81
Launching Applications
You can launch any application for which License On is set. Use the procedure below to launch an application.
Press the Application key. A list of available applications appears on the touch panel.
Application
Press the key for the application to be launched. The application starts up.
Internet Browser
Status
10/10/2008
10:10
3 4
To exit the application, press []. When the application exit confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
NOTE: The procedure for exiting some applications

may differ.
8-82
OPERATION GUIDE
Installing Applications
You can install new applications. Use the procedure below to install an application.
1 2 3
Insert the USB memory containing the application to be installed into the USB memory slot (A1). Press the System Menu key. Press [ ] and then [Application].
4
1/1
Press [Add].
Add
Delete
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Application - Add Insert the removable memory and select the application to be installed. more applications can be installed. Name Application 1 Application 2 Application 3 Version Activating Activating Activating Type/Result of Installation Succeeded Succeeded Succeeded
1/1
Select the application to be installed and press [Install]. You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
Remove Memory Install Detail
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the installation may take some time.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-83
Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.
7 8
To install another application, repeat steps 5 to 6. To remove the USB memory, press [Remove Memory] and wait until the Removable Memory can be safely removed message appears. Then remove the USB memory.
Deleting Applications
Use the procedure below to delete an installed application. IMPORTANT: Always exit the application to be deleted before deleting the application. (Refer to Starting/Exiting Application Use on page 8-81.)
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ] and then [Application].
NOTE: If login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password.
3
1/1
Select the application to be deleted and press [Delete]. You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
Add
Delete
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
When the deletion confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The application is deleted.
8-84
OPERATION GUIDE
System Initialization
Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode.
CAUTION: System initialization will erase Custom Document Boxes, data stored in Document Box, addresses
in the Address Book, user property, account information, and settings.
NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the optional Data Security Kit is installed. Refer to the Data Security Kit (E) OPERATION GUIDE on the bundled CD-ROM about the functions added when the Data Security Kit is installed and related procedures.
Using KM-NET VIEWER allows you to backup addresses in the Address Book.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Execute] of System Initialization. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. Initialization starts.
Adjustment/Maintenance Copy Density Adjustment: 0 Print Density: 3 Correcting Black Line: Off Display Brightness: 3 Yes No 1/2 This will be formatted. Are you sure? This process may take a while. Change Execute Next Send/Box Density Adjust.: 0 Change Next
IMPORTANT: The Formatting... Do not turn off the main power switch message appears during initialization. Wait until initialization ends.
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Once the initialization ends, the message Task is completed. Turn the main power switch off and on. appears. Turn the main power switch off.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-85
Restarting the System

Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.) Use the procedure below to restart the system.
1
System Network: Next Restart: Execute
Press the System Menu key. Press [System] and [Execute] of Restart.
2
Next Security Level: Low Change
Network Security:
Interface Block Setting:
Next
Data Security:
Next
Document Guard: Off
Change
Optional Function:
Next
NOTE: If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and password, and press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password.
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The system is restarted.
8-86
OPERATION GUIDE
Network Setup
The following network settings are available. LAN Interface Setup 8-87 TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup 8-87 TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup 8-88 NetWare Setup 8-90 AppleTalk Setup 8-90 FTP (Transmission) Setup 8-91 SMB (Transmission) Setup 8-91 Setting of Other Network 8-93
LAN Interface Setup

Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. The default setting is Auto. Use the procedure below to select the interface.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of LAN Interface. Select [Auto], [10BASE-T Half], [10BASE-T Full], [100BASE-TX Half] or [100BASE-TX Full] as the LAN interface.
System - LAN Interface Select the LAN Interface type.
Auto
10BASE-T Half
10BASE-T Full
100BASE-TX Half
100BASE-TX Full
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
4 5
Press [OK]. After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86.
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup

Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Refer to TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) on page 2-10 about the procedures.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-87
TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup

Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, TCP/IP (IPv6): On, DHCP (IPv6): On, RA (Stateless): On". Use the procedure below to setup the TCP/IP (IPv6) setting.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting. Press [Change] of TCP/IP. Press [On] and then press [OK]. Press [Change] of IPv6. Press [On]. Press [OK]. After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86.
DHCP (IPv6) Settings Select whether or not to use the DHCP (IPv6) server. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to specify the DHCP (IPv6) setting.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting. Press [Change] of TCP/IP. Press [On] and then press [OK]. Press [Change] of IPv6. Press [On]. Press [DHCP]. Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP. Press [OK]. turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86.
8-88
OPERATION GUIDE
RA (Stateless) Settings Select whether or not to use RA (Stateless).The default setting is On. Use the procedure below to set the ICMPv6 (NDP) setting.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting. Press [Change] of TCP/IP. Press [On] and then press [OK]. Press [Change] of IPv6. Press [On]. Press [RA(Stateless)] . Press [On] or [Off] of RA (Stateless). Press [OK].

turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86. Prefix Length Settings Set the prefix length. The default setting is 0. Use the procedure below to specify the prefix length.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting. Press [Change] of TCP/IP. Press [On] and then press [OK]. Press [Change] of IPv6. Press [On]. Press [Prefix Length] and then press [+] or [-] to enter the prefix length. You can enter a prefix length between 0 and 128. Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-89
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86.
NetWare Setup
Select the NetWare network connection. After that, select frame types for NetWare network from Auto, Ethernet-II, 802.3, 802.2, or SNAP. The default settings are "On, Frame Type: Auto". Use the procedure below to setup the NetWare setting.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of NetWare. Press [On].
System - NetWare Use NetWare to receive documents.
Off
Frame Type Auto Ether-II
On 802.3 802.2
SNAP
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
4 5 6
Press the key for the frame type you want to use. Press [OK]. After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86.
AppleTalk Setup
Select the Apple Talk network connection. Refer to AppleTalk Setup on page 2-12 about the procedures.
8-90
OPERATION GUIDE
FTP (Transmission) Setup

Select whether or not to send documents using FTP and set the port number to be used. The default setting is "On, Port Number: 21". Use the procedure below to setup the FTP (Transmission) setting.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of FTP (Transmission). Press [On] or [Off]. Press [+] or [-] to change the port number as desired. You can enter a port number between 1 and 65535.
System - FTP (Transmission) Use FTP to send documents.
Off (1 - 65535) On
21
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
4 SMB (Transmission) Setup
Press [OK].
Select whether or not to send documents using SMB and set the port number to be used. The default setting is "On, Port number: 139". Use the procedure below to setup the SMB (Transmission) setting.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of SMB (Transmission). Press [On] or [Off]. Press [+] or [-] to change the port number as desired. You can enter a port number between 1 and 65535.
System - SMB (Transmission) Use SMB to send documents.
Off (1 - 65535) On
139
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-91
IPP Setup
Select whether or not to use IPP and set the port number to be used. The default setting is "Off, Port number: 631". Use the procedure below to setup the IPP setting.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network, [ then [Change] of IPP. Press [On] or [Off]. Press [+] or [-] to change the port number as desired. You can enter any port number between 1 and 65535. ] (twice) and
System - IPP Use IPP to receive documents.
Off (1 - 65535) On
100
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
4 5
Press [OK]. After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86.
8-92
OPERATION GUIDE
Setting of Other Network

The table below lists the other network related function settings. Restarting the System*
Item NetBEUI
Description Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI. Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol. Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP. Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port. Select whether or not to use LDAP. Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP. Select whether or not to send e-mail using SMTP. Select whether or not to receive e-mail using POP3. Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP. Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setting on page 8-95. Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL. SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setting on page 8-95. Select whether or not to use WSD Scan. Select whether or not to use WSD Print.
Default Setting On
LPD
On
FTP (Reception)
On
Raw Port
On
LDAP SNMP SMTP (E-mail TX) POP3 (E-mail RX) HTTP HTTPS
Off On Off Off On On
IPP over SSL
Off
WSD Scan WSD Print

*
Off Off
: The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed. : The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-93
Use the procedure below. The following procedure is an example for specifying the SMTP (E-mail TX) settings.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [System] and then [Next] of Network to display the network settings screen. Display the item you want to set and press [Change] for that item. In this example, press [ SMTP (E-mail TX). ] and then [Change] of
4 5 6
Press [On] or [Off]. Press [OK]. After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86.
8-94
OPERATION GUIDE
Network Security
The network security functions can be set up to protect printer operation and the print data. The following network security settings are available. SSL Setting 8-95 SNMPv3 Setting 8-96 IPSec Setting 8-97
SSL Setting
This allows you to use SSL network security for communication. You can use SSL Setup to select whether or not SSL is used and to specify the IPP port and HTTP port security settings. Use the procedure below to specify the SSL settings.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network Security, and then [Next] of SSL Setting.
3 4 5
Press [Change] of SSL. Press [On]. Press [OK].
To set IPP port 1 2 3 Press [Change] of IPP Port Setting. Press [IPP over SSL Only] or [IPP or IPP over SSL]. Press [OK].
To set HTTP port 1 2 3 Press [Change] of HTTP Port Setting. Press [HTTP or HTTPS] or [HTTPS Only]. Press [OK].
After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-95
SNMPv3 Setting
Sets up SNMPv3. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network Security and then [Change] of SNMPv3.
NOTE: If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and password, and press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password.
3 4 5
Press [On]. Press [OK]. After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86.
8-96
OPERATION GUIDE
IPSec Setting
Sets up IPSec. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below to specify the IPSec settings.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Network Security, and then [Change] of IPSec.
3 4 5 6
Press [On]. Press [On] and [Off] of Rule Setting. Press [OK]. After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-86.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-97
Interface Block Setting

This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces. The following interface block settings are available: USB Host (USB memory slot setting) USB Device (USB interface setting) Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)
USB Host (USB memory slot setting)

This locks and protects the USB memory slot (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host). The default setting is Unblock. Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of USB Host.
3 4 USB Device (USB interface setting)
Press [Block]. Press [OK].
This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device). The default setting is Unblock. Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of USB Device.
8-98
OPERATION GUIDE
3 4
Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)

This locks and protects the optional interface slots (OPT1 or OPT2). The default setting is Unblock. Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of Optional Interface 1 or Optional Interface 2.
3 4
OPERATION GUIDE
8-99
Security Level (Security Level setting)

The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use this menu.
Document Guard Setting

When the optional Printed Document Guard Kit is installed, the machine prevents the unauthorized copying and/ or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information. The default setting is Off. When the machine detects the document guard pattern while scanning documents, the scanned document is printed in blank and sending of the document is canceled. Use the Security Watermark of Advanced in KX DRIVER to embed the guard pattern in a document. (Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide for details.) We suggest you to confirm how the machine performs this function on your environment.
copy Print the guard pattern using KX DRIVER.
Canceled. send or fax
Limitations: - Scanning speed will be limited to the speed of scanning 600 dpi image. (Printing speed will not be limited.) - FAX transmission will be limited to the memory transmission. - Scanning will be stopped as of the guard pattern is detected and the document will be printed in blank thereafter. Note: - The Printed Document Guard Kit should not fully prevents a leak of information. We do not guarantee any loss incurred while using this feature or when malfunction occurred with this feature. - We do not guarantee the integrity of the detection. If the malfunction occurs, contact your service representative.
8-100
OPERATION GUIDE
Use the procedure below to specify the Document Guard setting.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [System] and then [Change] of Document Guard.
Press [On]. To scan documents, press [Off].
Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
8-101
Optional Functions
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Overview of the Applications

The applications listed below are installed on this machine. You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis. Printed Document Guard Kit
This prevents the unauthorized copying and/or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information. When a document is printed from a computer, this feature imprints a special pattern on the document. When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine, the machine detects the pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank, prohibiting transmission.
NOTE: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ
depending on the application.
Starting Application Use

Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [System] and then [Next] of Optional Function.
System - Optional Function Manage the optional functions.
3
License Activating Stopped Stopped
1/1
Select the desired application and press [License On]. You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
Name Application 1 Application 2 Application 3
License On
Print Report
Detail
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
8-102
OPERATION GUIDE
License On Enter the activation code to use the application officially. The activation code is not necessary to use it as a trial.
In the license key entry screen, press [Official]. Some applications do not require you to enter an license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, go to Step 5. To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without entering the license key.
Activation Code
********
Cancel
Status
Trial
Official
10/10/2008 10:10
When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
IMPORTANT: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the application.
Checking Application Details

Use the procedure below to check the details of an application.
1 2
Press the System Menu key. Press [System] and then [Next] of Optional Function.
Select the application you want to check the details of and press [Detail]. You can now view detailed information on the selected application.
OPERATION GUIDE
8-103
8-104
OPERATION GUIDE
9 Maintenance
This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement. Cleaning........................................................................9-2 Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement ...9-8
OPERATION GUIDE
9-1
Maintenance
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality.
CAUTION: For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
Original Cover / Glass Platen

Wipe the backside of the original cover, the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent. IMPORTANT: Do not use thinner or other organic solvents. Original Cover
Glass Platen
9-2
OPERATION GUIDE
Maintenance
Slit Glass/Dual scanning area

Clean the slit glass.
1.Open the document processor. 2.Clean the surface of the slit glass located on the left side with the supplied dry cloth. 3.Close the document processor and press [End]. Note that dirty glass and sheet may cause black streaks to appear in the output.
If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the optional document processor, clean the slit glass with the supplied cleaning cloth. The message Clean the slit glass. may be displayed if the slit glass requires cleaning. When using the document processor to allow dual scanning, clean the dual scanning unit also.
02/03
Hold
Status
End
10/10/2008 10:10
IMPORTANT: Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth. Do not use water,soap or solvents for cleaning.
Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth compartment.
Open the document processor and wipe the slit glass (a).
3
b
Wipe the white guide (b) on the document processor.
When using the document processor to allow dual scanning, open the top cover of the document processor.
OPERATION GUIDE
9-3
Maintenance
Wipe the slit glass.
Wipe the white roller.
Close the document processor top cover and return the cleaning cloth to the cleaning cloth compartment. Press [End].
8 Separator
Clean the separator regularly (at least monthly) to ensure optimum output quality.
Open the front cover.
9-4
OPERATION GUIDE
Maintenance
Remove cleaning brush (blue colored).
Pull up and open left cover 1.
As shown in the figure, clean dirt from the separator by moving the brush from side to side along the separator.
Put away the cleaning brush, press the specified position of the front cover and left cover 1 to close.
OPERATION GUIDE
9-5
Maintenance
Transfer Roller 1
Remove the cleaning brush (blue colored).
Pull up and open left cover 1.
As shown in the figure, clean dirt from the transfer roller by moving the brush from side to side along the roller while rotating the roller by turning the gear at the left end of the roller.
9-6
OPERATION GUIDE
Maintenance
Put away the cleaning brush, press the specified position of the front cover and left cover 1 to close.
OPERATION GUIDE
9-7
Maintenance
Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement

When the touch panel displays Add toner, replace the toner. Every time you replace the toner container, be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. Dirty parts may deteriorate output quality.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks
may cause burns.
Toner Container Replacement 1

Turn the toner container release lever to the vertical position.
Pull out the old toner container as far as it will go.
9-8
OPERATION GUIDE
Maintenance
Remove the old toner container by pulling it out by the handle.
Place the used toner container in the provided plastic disposal bag. Hold the new toner container in both hands and shake it from side to side several times.
Hold the new toner container in both hands and gently push it in.
OPERATION GUIDE
9-9
Maintenance
Turn the toner container release lever to the horizontal position. Use the same procedure to replace the other color toner containers.
Close the front cover.
NOTE: Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations
Waste Toner Box Replacement 1

Press the release button (1) and pull out the waste toner tray (2).
9-10
OPERATION GUIDE
Maintenance
Cap the old waste toner box.
Remove the old waste toner box at an angle and place it in the plastic disposal bag provided.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Open the new waste toner box cap.
Install a new waste toner box.
OPERATION GUIDE
9-11
Maintenance
Press on the left edge of the new waste toner box to lock it.
Press the specified position to close the waste toner tray. When the tray reaches the correct position, it locks in place with a clicking sound.
Close the front cover.
NOTE: Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
9-12
OPERATION GUIDE
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine. Solving Malfunctions ...................................................10-2 Responding to Error Messages ..................................10-6 Clearing Paper Jams ................................................10-13
OPERATION GUIDE
10-1
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving. If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative. Reference Page
Symptom The operation panel does not respond when the main power switch is turned on. Pressing the Start key does not produce copies.
Checkpoints Is the machine plugged in?
Corrective Actions Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
Is there a message on the touch panel? Is the machine in Sleep mode?
Determine appropriate response to the message and respond accordingly. Press the Power key to recover the machine from Sleep mode. The machine will be ready to copy within 45 seconds. When placing originals on the platen, place them face-down and align them with the original size indicator plates. When placing originals in the optional document processor, place them face-up.
10-6
3-5
Blank sheets are ejected.
Are the originals loaded correctly?
2-29
2-30
Printouts are too light.
Is the machine in Auto Density mode? Is the machine in Manual Density mode?
Set the correct density level for auto density. Use [Image Quality] to set the correct density level. When changing the default density level, adjust the density manually and choose the desired level.
3-14
Is the toner distributed evenly within the toner container? Is there a message indicating the addition of toner? Is the paper damp? Is the drum dirty?
Shake the toner container from side to side about several times. Replace the toner container. Replace the paper with new paper. Carry out Drum Refresh. Carry out Developer Refresh.
9-8 9-8 2-16 8-53 8-63 8-63 8-45
Is the scanner dirty? Is EcoPrint mode enabled?
Carry out Laser Scanner Cleaning. Disable EcoPrint mode.
10-2
OPERATION GUIDE
Troubleshooting
Symptom Printouts are too dark.
Checkpoints Is the machine in Auto Density mode? Is the machine in Manual Density mode?
Corrective Actions Set the correct density level for auto density. Use [Image Quality] to set the correct density level. When changing the default density level, adjust the density manually and choose the desired level.
Reference Page 3-14
Copies have a moire pattern (dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly). Printouts are not clear. Printouts are dirty.
Is the original a printed photograph?
Set the image quality to [Print Photo].
3-14
Did you choose appropriate image quality for the original? Is the platen or the document processor dirty? Is the transfer roller dirty? Is the drum dirty?
Select appropriate image quality. Clean the platen or the document processor. Brush the transfer roller clean. Carry out Drum Refresh. Carry out Developer Refresh.
9-2 9-2 9-6 8-53 8-63 8-63 Appendix6 8-53 2-30
Is the scanner dirty? Is the Printed Document Guard Kit enabled? Printouts are fuzzy. Images are skewed. Is the machine being used in very humid conditions? Are the originals placed correctly?
Carry out Laser Scanner Cleaning. Disable the Printed Document Guard Kit. Carry out Drum Refresh. When placing originals on the platen, align them with the original size indicator plates. When placing originals in the optional document processor, align the original width guides securely before placing the originals.
10
2-30
Is the paper loaded correctly?
Check the position of the paper width guides.
2-31
OPERATION GUIDE
10-3
Troubleshooting
Symptom Paper often jams.
Checkpoints Is the paper loaded correctly? Is the paper of the supported type? Is it in good condition? Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled? Are there any loose scraps or jammed paper in the machine?
Corrective Actions Load the paper correctly. Remove the paper, turn it over, and reload it. Replace the paper with new paper. Remove any jammed paper.
Reference Page 2-17 2-17 2-17 10-13
Printouts from the document processor have black lines. Printouts are wrinkled.
Is the slit glass dirty?
9-3
Is the paper separator of the paper feed unit dirty? Is the paper damp? Is the paper set in a proper orientation?
Clean the paper separator. Replace the paper with new paper. Change the orientation in which the paper is positioned. Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. Turn on the main power switch. Connect the correct printer cable securely. Power on the machine after connecting the printer cable. Press the Status/Job Cancel key, [Printing Jobs], and then [Resume All Print Jobs] to restart printing. Check that the printer driver and application software settings are set properly. Check the panel lock setting in COMMAND CENTER and change the setting if necessary.
9-4 2-16 3-2 2-3 2-3
Cannot print.
Is the machine plugged in? Is the machine powered on? Is the printer cable connected? Was the machine powered on before the printer cable was connected? Is Press Status Key... displayed at the top of the screen?
Documents are printed improperly. While the operation panel was being used, the keys locked up and do not respond when pressed.
Are the application software settings at the PC set properly? Is the operation panel locked?
KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide
10-4
OPERATION GUIDE
Troubleshooting
Symptom Cannot print with USB memory.
Checkpoints Was the USB memory formatted with a machine other than this machine? Is the USB host blocked? Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine.
Corrective Actions Format the USB memory with this machine. Select Unblock in the USB host settings.
Reference Page 6-16
8-98
When displaying an image sent from the machine on the PC, an image size is shrunk vertically or horizontally. USB memory not recognized.
Have you selected 200100dpi Normal or 200400dpi Super Fine for the scan resolution?
Select a scan resolution other than 200100dpi Normal or 200400dpi Super Fine when sending an image.
Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine. Is the USB host blocked?
Select Unblock in the USB host settings. Whenever the printed hues differ from the original document or image, carry out Gray Adjustment.
8-98 8-60
Perform Gray Adjustment in the System Menu. is displayed. Performing Color Calibration... appears during continuous copying and copying stops. White or color streaks appear on prints.
Over long periods of use, the effects of the ambient temperature and humidity can cause color output hues to vary slightly. The machine is carrying out a calibration process to ensure color stability.
10
This is not a fault.Resume continuous copying when the calibration process ends. 8-60
The inside of the machine may be dirty.
Carry out Laser Scanner Cleaning.
8-63
OPERATION GUIDE
10-5
Troubleshooting
Responding to Error Messages

If the touch panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
Alphanumeric
Error Message Acceptable staple count exceeded. Checkpoints Is the acceptable staple count exceeded? For details, refer to Specifications on page Appendix-9,10,11. Is the indicated cassette out of paper? Is the paper of the selected size loaded in the multi purpose tray? Has any of the document finisher run out of staples? Corrective Actions Press [Continue] to print without stapling. Press [Cancel] to cancel the job. Reference Page
Add paper in cassette 1. Add paper in Multi Purpose tray. Add staples.
Load paper. Load the paper in the multi purpose tray which is of the size and type indicated on the touch panel. If the staples are depleted, the machine will stop and the location of staple depletion will be indicated on the touch panel. Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to replace the staple case. Press [Continue] to print without stapling. Press [Cancel] to cancel the job. Replace the toner container. Document box is full, and no further storage is available; Job is canceled. Press [End]. Repeat Copy box is full, and no further repeat copy is available. Press [Continue] to print without using Repeat Copy. Press [Cancel] to cancel the job. Press [End] and check the following items: Registration to Authentication Serve Password and computer address for Authentication Server Connection of Network
2-16 2-20
Add toner. [C][M][Y][K] Box limit exceeded.
9-8
Cannot connect to Authentication Server.
10-6
OPERATION GUIDE
Troubleshooting
Error Message Cannot duplex print on this paper. Cannot execute this job. Cannot offset this paper.
Checkpoints Did you select a paper size/ media type that cannot be duplex printed?
Corrective Actions Select the available paper type. Press [Continue] to print without using Duplex. This job is canceled because it is restricted by Job Accounting. Press [End]. Select the available paper size. Press [Continue] to print without using Offset. Select a position that can be stapled. Press [Continue] to print without using Staple. Select the available paper size/type. Press [Continue] to print without using Staple. Close the cover indicated on the touch panel. Close the document processor. Close the top cover of the document processor. Set the document finisher correctly. For details, refer to the respective Operation Guides. Clean the slit glass using the cleaning cloth supplied with the document processor. The machine detects the documents guard pattern. The scanned document is printed in blank and sending of the document is canceled. The job is canceled. Press [End]. The job is canceled. Press [End]. FAX box is full, and no further storage is available. The job is canceled. Press [End].
Reference Page 3-17
Did you select a paper size (A3, B4, A5-R, B6-R, Folio, Ledger, Statement and 8K) that cannot be offset? Have you selected a position that cannot be stapled? Did you select a paper size/ type that cannot be stapled? Is there any cover which is open? Is the document processor open? Is the top cover of the document processor open?
3-19
Cannot staple at the specified position. Cannot staple this paper. Check the cover. Check the document processor.
10-25
10
Check the finisher.
Is the document finisher set correctly?
9-3
Confidential document is detected.
8-100
Failed to specify Job Accounting. Failed to store job retention data. FAX box limit exceeded.
OPERATION GUIDE
10-7
Troubleshooting
Error Message Finisher tray is full of paper.
Checkpoints Is the acceptable storage capacity exceeded for the document finisher tray?
Corrective Actions Remove paper from the document finisher tray. If printing can be restarted, the touch panel display will prompt you to press [Continue]. Then press [Continue]. An error has occurred on the hard disk. The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows. 01: Initialization error. Initialize the hard disk. 04: Insufficient space on the hard disk to complete this operation. Move or delete data stored on the hard disk to increase available space. Enter correct login user name or password. The printing count exceeded the acceptable count restricted by Job Accounting. Cannot print any more. This job is canceled. Press [End]. Take some paper out of the job separator. Printing then resumes. PostScript error has occurred. The job is canceled. Press [End]. Internal error has occurred. Make a note of the error code displayed on the touch panel. Turn off the machine, unplug the power cord, and contact your Service Representative. Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up. Press [Continue] to print the scanned pages. The print job cannot be processed completely. Press [Cancel] to cancel the job. If a paper jam occurs, the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel. Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper. This job is canceled. Press [End].
Reference Page
Hard Disk error. Job is canceled. Press [End]. ##
Incorrect Login User Name or Password. Job Accounting restriction exceeded.
Is the acceptable printing count restricted by Job Accounting exceeded? Is the maximum capacity of the job separator exceeded?
Job separator is full of paper. KPDL error. Machine failure.
Memory is full.
Paper jam.
10-13
Removable memory error.
10-8
OPERATION GUIDE
Troubleshooting
Error Message Replace all originals and press [Continue].
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions Remove originals from the document processor, put them back in their original order, and place them again. Press [Continue] to resume printing. Press [Cancel] to cancel the job. The waste toner box is full. Replace the waste toner box. Remove originals from the document processor. Scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory of scanner. The job is canceled. Press [End]. Press [Continue] to print, send or store the scanned pages. Press [Cancel] to cancel printing, sending or storing. An error has occurred during transmission. The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows. 1101: The server name of the SMTP server is not set correctly or the host name is incorrect when sending scan data to an FTP server. Use COMMAND CENTER and register the SMTP server name and the host name correctly. 1102: The login user name is incorrect or the domain name has not been entered. Enter login user name, domain name and password correctly. 1103: The network path name is incorrect or you do not have access to the folder specified. Use COMMAND CENTER and register the path name correctly. 1104: No recipient address. Enter Email address correctly.
Reference Page 2-30
Replace the waste toner box. Remove all originals in the document processor. Scanner memory is full.
Are there any originals left in the document processor?
9-8
Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded?
Send error. Job is canceled. Press [End]. ####
2-14
10
3-29
3-30
OPERATION GUIDE
10-9
Troubleshooting
Error Message Send error. Job is canceled. Press [End]. ####
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions 1105: E-mail - The SMTP protocol setting is turned off. Use COMMAND CENTER and turn on the SMTP protocol setting. Scan to PC (SMB) - SMB setting is turned off. Use COMMAND CENTER and turn on the SMB setting. Scan to PC (FTP) - FTP setting is turned off. Use COMMAND CENTER and turn on the FTP setting. 1106: The sender address setting under E-mail: SMTP is not registered. Use COMMAND CENTER and register the sender address. 2101, 2102, 2103, 2201, 2202, 2203, 3101: The network cable is disconnected or the hub that it is connected to is not operating properly. Check the cable and the hub. Otherwise, the server name or the host name of the SMTP server is not set correctly. Use COMMAND CENTER and register the SMTP server name and the host name correctly. 2204: The E-mail size exceeds the acceptable send data capacity. Decrease the size or resolution of the scanned data to be transmitted and resend the E-mail. 5101, 5102, 5103, 5104, 7102, 720f: Turn the main power switch off and back on. If this error occurs several times, make a note of the displayed error code and contact your service representative.(Refer to the corrective action for the error message An error has occurred.) 9181: The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number of pages of 999. Send the excess pages separately. If a staple jam occurs, the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel. Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed staple.
Reference Page 2-14
2-14
2-14
Staple jam.
10-10
OPERATION GUIDE
Troubleshooting
Error Message System error. Turn the main power switch off and on. Incorrect account ID. The phone receiver is off the hook. The removable memory is not formatted. The source file is not found. Top tray of the machine is full of paper. Unknown Toner Installed. [C][M][Y][K]
Checkpoints
Corrective Actions System error has occurred. Turn the main power switch off and on. The Account ID does not match. Check the registered Account ID. Put down the receiver. Use the removable memory formatted by this machine. The specified file is not found. The job is canceled. Press [End]. Remove paper from the top tray, and press [Continue] to resume the job. If the toner container was taken from a different machine of the same model while it was displaying the Add toner. [C][M][Y][K] message, ignore the message and use the toner. Further scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory. Press [Continue] to print the scanned pages. Press [Cancel] to cancel the printing job. The waste toner box is not installed correctly. Set it correctly.
Reference Page
Is the removable memory formatted by this machine?
Warning low memory.
10
Set the waste toner box.
9-8
OPERATION GUIDE
10-11
Troubleshooting
Responding to an Error Lamp Flashes

If an error lamp flashes, press [Status/Job Cancel] to check an error message. If the message is not indicated on the touch panel when [Status/Job Cancel] is pressed or the error lamp flashes for 1.5 seconds, check the following. Symptom Cannot send fax. Checkpoints Is the modular cord connected correctly? Is Permitted FAX No. or Permitted ID No. registered correctly? Corrective Actions Connect the modular cord correctly. Check Permitted FAX No. and Permitted ID No.. FAX System (Q) Operation Guide Chapter 6 "Registering Permit FAX No." and "Registering Permit ID No." FAX System (Q) Operation Guide Appendix "Error Code List" Reference Page
Has a communication error occurred?
Check error codes in the TX/RX Result Report and Activity Report. If the error code starts with "U" or "E", perform the corresponding procedure. Send again. Send again. Contact your Service Representative.
Is the destination FAX line busy? Does the destination FAX machine respond? Is there an error other than above?
10-12
OPERATION GUIDE
Troubleshooting
Clearing Paper Jams

Job No.: 000021 Job Name: doc200810101010 User Name: Mike
Paper jam.
1.Remove any paper that is inside. 2.Open the fuser cover and remove the jammed paper. 3.Open cassette 1. 4.Remove the paper. 5.Set the cassette and close the cover.
If a paper jam occurs, the touch panel will display Paper misfeed and the machine will stop. Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper.
JAM
03/05
Hold
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Jam Location Indicators

If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed as the following figure with a letter corresponding to the affected component in the machine. Clearing instructions will also be displayed.
Job No.: 000021
Job Name: doc200810101010
User Name: Mike
Paper jam.
1.Remove the paper. 2.Open the fuser cover and remove the jammed paper. 3.Close the cover. JAM
H I G
01/03
I I I I
10/10/2008 10:10
G E G E E E F I I F A B C
Hold
Status
I I
10
Paper Jam Location Indicator A B C D E F G
Paper Jam Location Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 or 4 (Option) Multi Purpose Tray Duplex unit Inside the left cover 1, 3 or 4 Fixing unit
Reference Page 10-14 10-15 10-16 10-17 10-21 10-20 10-23
OPERATION GUIDE
10-13
Troubleshooting
Paper Jam Location Indicator H I
Paper Jam Location Document processor (Option) Document finisher (Option)
Reference Page 10-25 10-27
After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes with the page which jam has occurred.
Precautions with Paper Jams

Do not reuse jammed papers. If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine. Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming. Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher. A page affected by a paper jam will be printed again.
CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is
a danger of getting burned.
Cassette 1
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 1.
Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 1.
Remove the jammed paper.
10-14
OPERATION GUIDE
Troubleshooting
Pull out cassette 1.
Remove the jammed paper. If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from inside the machine.
5 6
Push cassette 1 back in place securely. Press the specified position to close left cover 1.
10
Cassette 2
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 2.
Open left cover 3.
OPERATION GUIDE
10-15
Troubleshooting
5 6 Optional Cassettes 3 and 4
Push cassette 2 back in place securely. Close left cover 3.
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassettes 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder.
Open left cover 4.
10-16
OPERATION GUIDE
Troubleshooting
Pull out the cassette in use.
10
5 6 Multi Purpose Tray
Push the cassette back in place securely. Close left cover 4.
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray.
Remove all papers from the multi purpose tray.
OPERATION GUIDE
10-17
Troubleshooting
If paper is jammed inside, pull the paper toward you to remove.
Open the feed guide B1.
10-18
OPERATION GUIDE
Troubleshooting
Turn the lower green knob (B2) to the left at least 10 times.
10
Remove the jammed paper. If you cannot remove the paper, proceed with the next step.
OPERATION GUIDE
10-19
Troubleshooting
10 Pull out paper feed unit (B3).
11 Open paper feed unit cover (B4) and remove the

jammed paper.
12 Push paper feed unit (B3) back in place, and push

the cassette back in place securely.
13 Press the specified position to close left cover 1.
Inside the Left Covers 1, 3 and 4

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside left cover 1, 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder.
Open the left cover where the paper is jammed inside.
10-20
OPERATION GUIDE
Troubleshooting
3 Duplex Unit
Close the left cover.
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the duplex unit.
Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover.
10
OPERATION GUIDE
10-21
Troubleshooting
Press the specified position to close left cover 1.
Duplex Unit and Cassette 1

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in duplex unit and cassette 1.
Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover.
Press the specified position to close left cover 1.
10-22
OPERATION GUIDE
Troubleshooting
If the left cover 2 indicator is flashing, open left cover 2.
6 7
Close the left cover 2. Pull out cassette 1 and remove the jammed paper. If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from inside the machine.
10
8 Fixing unit
Push cassette 1 back in place securely.
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the fixing unit.
OPERATION GUIDE
10-23
Troubleshooting
Open the fuser cover (A1).
CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting burned.
10-24
OPERATION GUIDE
Troubleshooting
If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection slot, pull it toward your side to remove it.
Push fuser cover back in place, and press the specified position to close left cover 1.
Optional Document Processor

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document processor.
Remove the original from the original tray.
10
Open the document processor top cover.
OPERATION GUIDE
10-25
Troubleshooting
Remove the jammed original. If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from inside the machine.
If the original is difficult to remove, turn the dial. The original will scroll out to a position where it can be removed easily. If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from inside the machine.
Lift up reverse unit.
Remove the jammed original. If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from inside the machine.
6 7
Put reverse unit back in its original place and close the document processor top cover. Reload the originals on the document processor tray.
10-26
OPERATION GUIDE
Troubleshooting
Optional Document Finisher

If a misfeed occurs in the optional document finisher, refer to the respective Operation Guides to clear the jam.
Optional Job Separator

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional job separator.
If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection slot of the job separator, pull it toward your side to remove it. If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from inside the machine.
Pull up left cover 1 lever and open left cover 1.
10
3
Press the lever and open the job separator.
OPERATION GUIDE
10-27
Troubleshooting
Press the indicated position to close left cover 1.
10-28
OPERATION GUIDE
11 Management
This chapter explains the following operations. User Login Administration........................................... 11-2 Job Accounting ......................................................... 11-10 Data Security Kit Operations..................................... 11-26
OPERATION GUIDE
11-1
Management
User Login Administration

User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to log in. Access are in three levels - User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator.
First User Login Administration

Follow these steps for the first user login administration. Enable user login administration. (page 11-2) Add a user.(page 11-4) Log out.(page 11-4) The registered user logs in for operations.(page 11-3)
Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration

This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods: Item Local Authentication Network Authentication Description User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine. User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.
Use the procedure below to enable user login administration.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Next] of User Login Setting and then [Change] of User Login.
11-2
OPERATION GUIDE
Management
User Login/Job Accounting - User Login User login administration. Select authentication method. Off Host Name Local Authentication Domain Name Network Authentication Expansion Authentication Server Type NTLM
Kerberos
Select [Local Authentication] or [Network Authentication]. Select [Off] to disable user login administration. If you select [Network Authentication], enter the host name (62 characters or less) and domain name (256 characters or less) for the Authentication Server. Select [NTLM] or [Kerberos] as the server type.
# Keys
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
NOTE: If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.
Network Authentication setting of the machine User property of the Authentication Server Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings. If the server type is [Kerberos], only domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized.
6 Login/Logout
Press [OK].
Once you enable user login administration, a login user name and password entry screen appears each time you use this machine. Login Log in using the procedure below.
11
1
If the screen below appears during the operations, press [Login User Name]. Press [# keys] to enter the login data using the numeric keys.
# Keys Login Password ******** # Keys
Enter login user name and password.

Login to: Login User Name Local
abcdef
IC Card Login Check Counter

Status
Cancel
Login
10/10/2008 10:10
Enter the login user name and press [OK].

OPERATION GUIDE
11-3
Management
Press [Login Password]. Press [# keys] to enter the login data using the numeric keys.
Enter the login password and press [OK].
NOTE: If Job Accounting is enabled, you can browse the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned by pressing [Counter Check]. If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method, either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication destination.
5
Logout
Check the login user name and password are correct, and press [Login].
To log out the machine, press the Logout key to return to the login user name/login password entry screen. Auto Logout Logout is automatically executed in the following cases: When the Power key is pressed to enter the sleep mode When auto sleep is activated When auto panel reset is activated When auto low power mode is activated When low power mode is activated by pressing the Energy Saver key.
Adding a User This adds a new user. You can add Up to 1,000 users (including the default login user name). The table below explains the user information to be registered. Item User Name* Login User Name* Login Password* Access Level* Description Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters). Enter the login user name to log in (up to 64 characters). The same login user name cannot be registered. Enter the password to log in (up to 64 characters). Select Administrator or User for user access privileges.
11-4
OPERATION GUIDE
Management
Item Account Name
Description Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her account name, can log in without entering the account ID. Refer to Job Accounting on page 11-10. The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E-mail function.
E-mail Address
Mandatory at user registration.
NOTE: By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored. Each user's properties are: Machine Administrator
User Name: DeviceAdmin Login User Name: 25/25 ppm model : 2500, 30/30 ppm model : 3000, 40/40 ppm model : 4000, 50/40 ppm model : 5000 Login Password: 25/25 ppm model : 2500, 30/30 ppm model : 3000, 40/40 ppm model : 4000, 50/40 ppm model : 5000 Access Level: Machine Administrator When the optional Data Security Kit is installed, the login user name and login user password are as shown below. 25/25 ppm model :25002500, 30/30 ppm model : 30003000, 40/40 ppm model : 40004000, 50/40 ppm model : 50005000 Administrator User Name: Login User Name: Login Password: Access Level: Admin Admin Admin Administrator
11
When the optional Data Security Kit is installed, the login user name and login user password are same. It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your security. Use the procedure below to register a new user.
1 2 3 4
Log in as a user with administrator rights. Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Register/Edit] of Local User List, and then [Add].
OPERATION GUIDE
11-5
Management
User: User Name: 01 User Login User Name: 0099 Access Level: User E-mail Address: abcd@efg.com Change Change Change Login Password: ********** Account Name: 02 Account IC Card Information: Empty Change Change Change Change
Press [Change] of User Name.
Cancel
Status
Register
10/10/2008 10:10
Enter the user name and press [OK].

8 9
Enter the login user name and E-mail address following 6 and 7 above. Press [Change] of Login Password and then [Password].
10 Enter the login password and press [OK]. 11 Press [Confirm Password]. 12 Enter the same login password to confirm and
press [OK].
13 Press [OK]. 14 Press [Change] of Access Level. 15 Select the user access privilege and press [OK]. 16 Press [Change] of Account Name.
User: - Account Name Select account to which this user will be attached. Sort Account Name 01 Account 02 Account 03 Account 04 Account 05 Account 00001000 Search(Name) 00002000 Search(ID) 00003000 00004000 00005000 Detail
1/2
17 Select the account and press [OK].

Name Account ID
NOTE: Select [Name] and [ID] from the Sort pull-down menu to sort the account list. Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID.
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
18 Press [Register] to add a new user on the local user

list.
11-6
OPERATION GUIDE
Management
Changing User Properties

User properties can be changed. Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege. For a user with administrator rights who logs in User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be changed. Use the procedure below to change the user properties.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Next] of User Login Setting and [Register/ Edit] of Local User List. Select the user whose properties you wish to change.
4 5
NOTE: Select [Name] and [Login Name] from the Sort pull-down menu to sort the user list.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(Login)] to search by name or login user name. The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited. Changing user information 1
User: User Name: 01 User Login User Name: 0099 Access Level: User E-mail Address: abcd@efg.com Change Change Change Login Password: ********** Account Name: 02 Account IC Card Information: Empty Change Change Change Change
11
Press [Detail]. Refer to steps 6 to 17 of Adding a User to change a user property.
Cancel
Status
Register
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [Register].
OPERATION GUIDE
11-7
Management
Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation screen. The user information is changed.
Deleting a user 1 2 Press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm deletion. The selected user will be deleted.
NOTE: The default user with administrator rights

cannot be deleted. For a user without administrator rights who logs in These users can partially change their own user properties including user name, login password, and E-mail address. Although login user name, access level, or account name cannot be changed, the users can check the present status. Use the procedure below to change user properties.
1 2
User: User Name: 01 User Login User Name: 0099 Access Level: User E-mail Address: abcd@efg.com Change Detail Login Password: ********** Account Name: 02 Account IC Card Information: Empty Detail Change Change
Press the System Menu key. Press [User Property]. Refer to steps 6 to 17 of Adding a User to change user properties. Press [Detail] of Login User Name or Account Name to check the present status.
Cancel
Status
Register
10/10/2008 10:10
Press [Register] to finalize changed user properties.
11-8
OPERATION GUIDE
Management
Unknown login user name Job

This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID (i.e. unsent IDs). If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account ID is unknown. The table below shows the available settings. Item Reject Permit Description The job is rejected (not printed). The job is permitted to be printed.
Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Change] of Unknown ID Job. Press [Reject] or [Permit]. Press [OK].
4 5 6
11
OPERATION GUIDE
11-9
Management
Job Accounting
Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account. Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations. Manageability of up to 1,000 individual accounts. Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security. Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID. Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined. Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies. Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined.
First Job Accounting Setup

Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup. Enable job accounting. (page 11-10) Add an account. (page 11-12) Log out. (page 11-11) Other users log in for operations. (page 11-11)
Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting

Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, and then [Change] of Job Accounting. Press [On]. To disable job accounting, press [Off].
4 5
11-10
OPERATION GUIDE
Management
Press [OK].
NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the Account ID.
Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine. Use the procedure below to login and logout. Login
1
Enter the account ID.
In the screen below, enter the account ID using the numeric keys and press [Login].
********
NOTE: If you entered a wrong character, press the Clear key and enter the account ID again.
If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound and login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.
Check Counter
Status
Login
10/10/2008 10:10
By pressing [Counter Check], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned. When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password appears. Enter a login user name and password to log in. (Refer to Login/Logout on page 11-3.) If the user has already registered the account information, the account ID entry would be skipped. (Refer to Adding a User on page 114.)
11
2
Logout
Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
When the operations are complete, press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen.
OPERATION GUIDE
11-11
Management
Adding an Account
This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required. Item Account Name Account ID Restriction Description Enter the account name (up to 32 characters). Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999). This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-15.
Use the procedure below to register a new account.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Register/ Edit] of Accounting List, and then [Add]. Press [Change] of Account Name.
4 5
Change Change
Account: Account Name: 01 Account Account ID: 00001000 Copy Restriction (Total): Off Copy Restr. (Full Color): Off Copy Restr. (SingleColor): Off Change 1/2 Change Change Print Restrict. (Total): Off Print Restrict. (Color): Off Change Change
Cancel
Status
Register
10/10/2008 10:10
Enter the account name and press [OK]. The Account screen reappears.

Follow steps 5 and 6 above to enter the Account ID.
11-12
OPERATION GUIDE
Management
NOTE: Any account ID that has already registered

cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.
8 9 Managing Accounts
Activate or deactivate restriction. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-15. Press [Register] to add a new account on the Account List.
This changes the registered account information or deletes the account. Use the procedure below to manage accounts.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then [Register/Edit] of Accounting List. Select an account to change or delete.
4 5
Sort Account Name 01 Account 02 Account 03 Account 04 Account 05 Account 00001000 Search(Name) 00002000 Search(ID) 00003000 00004000 00005000 Detail Delete 1/2 Add Name Account ID
User Login/Job Accounting - Accounting List Register an account that is permitted to use this machine. (Maximum: 1000)
NOTE: Select [Name] or [ID] from the Sort pull-down menu to sort the account names.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID. The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
11
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
OPERATION GUIDE
11-13
Management
Changing account information 1

Account: Account Name: 01 Account Account ID: 00001000 Copy Restriction (Total): Off Copy Restr. (Full Color): Off Copy Restr. (SingleColor): Off Change 1/2 Change Change Print Restrict. (Total): Off Print Restrict. (Color): Off Change Change Change Change
Press [Detail]. Refer to steps 5 to 7 of Adding an Account and steps 2 to 5 of Restricting Using the Machine to change account information.
Cancel
Status
Register
10/10/2008 10:10
3 4
Press [Register]. Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation screen. The account information is changed.
Deleting an account 1 2 Press [Delete]. Press [Yes]. To delete the account.
Managing the Copier/Printer Counts

You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-15, Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11-20 and Printing an Accounting Report on page 11-24 for details. Use the procedure below to set the counting methods.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of Default Setting and then [Change] of Copier/Printer Count. Press [Total] or [Split]. Press [OK].
5 6
11-14
OPERATION GUIDE
Management
Restricting the Use of the Machine

This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available. The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Counts on page 11-14. Restriction Items [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item Copy Restriction (Total) Copy Restr. (Full Color) Copy Restr. (SingleColor) Print Restriction (Total) Print Restriction (Color) Scan Restriction (Others) Fax TX Restriction FAX Port Restriction Detail Limits the total number of sheets used for full-color, single-color, and black and white copying. Limits the number of sheets used for full-color copying. Limits the number of sheets used for single-color copying. Limits the total number of sheets used for color and black and white printing. Limits the number of sheets used for color printing. Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying). Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed. Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX kits are installed.
11
[Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item Print Restriction (Total) Print Restr. (Full Color) Print Restr. (SingleCol.) Scan Restriction (Others) Fax TX Restriction Detail Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing. Limits the number of sheets used for full-color printing. Limits the number of sheets used for single-color printing. Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying). Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
OPERATION GUIDE
11-15
Management
Item FAX Port Restriction Applying Restriction Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows: Item Off Counter Limit Reject Usage
*
Detail Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX kits are installed.
Description No restriction given Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies. Restriction is applied.
Select [Off], [Use Port 1 Only] or [Use Port 2 Only] as the FAX Port Restriction setting.
Use the procedure below to select a restriction method.
1 2
Account:** - Copy Restriction (Total) Restrict use of the functions.
Follow steps 1 to 4 of Adding an Account on page 11-12. Press [Change] for the item to be restricted. Select the restriction mode. If [Counter Limit] is selected, press [+],[-] or numeric keys to select the number of pages.
Off
Limit (1 - 9999999)
Counter Limit
99999
page(s)
Reject Usage
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
4 5 6
Press [OK]. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other accounts to be restricted. Press [Register]. The restricted account is added.
11-16
OPERATION GUIDE
Management
Applying Limit of Restriction This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below describes the action taken. Item Immediately * Subsequently Alert Only
*
Description Job stops when the counter reaches its limit. Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected. Job continues while displaying an alert message.
The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.
Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of Default Setting and then [Change] of Apply Limit. Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert Only]. Press [OK].
4 5 6
11
OPERATION GUIDE
11-17
Management
Default Counter Limit

When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999 in 1-sheet increments. The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/ Printer Counts on page 11-14. Available Settings [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item Copy Restriction (Total) Copy Restr. (Full Color) Copy Restr. (SingleColor) Print Restriction (Total) Print Restriction (Color) Scan Restriction (Others) FAX TX Restriction Detail Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for color and black and white copying. Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color copying. Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for single-color copying. Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for color and black and white printing. Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for color printing. Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying). Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
[Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count Item Print Restriction (Total) Print Restr. (Full Color) Print Restriction (Single Color) Scan Restriction (Others) FAX TX Restriction Detail Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing. Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color printing. Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for single-color printing. Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying). Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
11-18
OPERATION GUIDE
Management
Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and password, and press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of Default Setting and then [Next] of Default Counter Limit. Press [Change] for the item you want to modify and then press [+] or [-] or use the numeric keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets.
User Login/Job Accounting - Copy Restriction (Total) Set the default limit value for restricting use of the functions for each account by counter.
(1 - 9999999)
9999999
Cancel
Status
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
6 7
Press [OK]. To set another default restriction, repeat steps 5 to 6.
11
OPERATION GUIDE
11-19
Management
Counting the Number of Pages Printed

This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time. Types of the counts are as follows. Item Printed Pages Detail Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. You can also use [Count by Paper Size] and [Count by Duplex/ Combine] to check the number of pages used. For copying, you can check the pages used for black and white, full-color and single-color copying as well as the total pages used. For printing, you can check the pages used for black and white and full-color printing as well as the total pages used. You can use [Count by Paper Size] to check the number of pages used in the paper size set in Counting by Paper Size on page 11-23 as well as the number of pages used in other paper sizes. You can use the [Count by Duplex/Combine] to check the number of pages used in Duplex (1sided) mode, Duplex (2-sided) mode and the total for both, as well as the pages used in Combine (None) mode, Combine (2in1) mode, Combine (4in1) mode and the total for all three.
Scanned Pages
Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing* and other functions, as well as the total number of pages scanned. Displays the number of pages faxed.
FAX Transmission Pages* FAX Transmission Time*

*
Displays the total duration of fax transmissions.
Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
11-20
OPERATION GUIDE
Management
Total Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time. Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then [Next] of Total Job Accounting. Press [Check] at the function to check the count. The results will be displayed.
4 5
Scanned Pages: Check FAX Transmission Time: 00:00:10
User Login/Job Accounting - Total Job Accounting Printed Pages: Check
FAX Transmission Pages: 2
Counter Reset:
Execute
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
6 7 8
Confirm the count and press [Close]. Press [Execute] of Counter Reset to reset the counter. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset. The counter is reset.
11
OPERATION GUIDE
11-21
Management
Each Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and [Check] of Each Job Accounting. Select the account to check the count.
4
User Login/Job Accounting - Each Job Accounting Maintain a separate counter for each account (department). Sort Account Name 06 Account 00006000 Search(Name) Search(ID) 2/2 Name
5
Account ID
NOTE: Select [Name] or [ID] from the Sort pull-down menu to sort the account names.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID.
Detail
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
6
Account: Printed Pages: Check Scanned Pages: Check
Press [Detail]. Press [Check] at the function to check the count. The results will be displayed.
7
FAX Transmission Time: 0:00:10
FAX Transmission Pages: 2(20)
Counter Reset:
Execute
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
8 9
Confirm the count and press [Close]. Press [Execute] of Counter Reset to reset the counter. counter will be reset.
10 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset. The
11-22
OPERATION GUIDE
Management
Counting by Paper Size This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).
NOTE: Paper size is available in five types, - 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting reports. Refer to
Printing an Accounting Report on page 11-24. In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size color paper used). If no media type is specified, usage is counted for all media types of that size. Use the procedure below to count the number of pages.
1 2 3
Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of Default Setting, [Change] of Count by Paper Size, [Change] of Paper Size 1 to 5 and then [On]. Select the paper size.
User Login/Job Accounting - Paper Size 1 Select the paper sizes and types to count.
5
A4 B4 Folio Legal Statement Plain Media Type
Off
A3 A5 B5 Ledger Letter
On
11
Cancel
Status
OK
2008/10/10 10:10
6 7 8
Press [Media Type] to specify media type. Select the media type and press [OK]. Press [Close].
OPERATION GUIDE
11-23
Management
Printing an Accounting Report

Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report. Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered. When Split is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Count
ACCOUNT.REPORT
TASKalfa 500ci
Firmware Version
For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size. Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.
1 2 3 4
Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the cassette. Press the System Menu key. Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-4 for the default login user name and password. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then [Print] of Print Accounting Report. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the printing.
5 6
11-24
OPERATION GUIDE
Management
Unknown Account ID Jobs

The behavior of the machine when it receives a job from unknown account ID (i.e. unsent ID) can be specified. Refer to Unknown login user name Job on page 11-9 for details.
Checking and Printing Counter

Counter Printed Pages Copy Black&White: Full Color: SingleColor: Total: 300 200 100 600 Printer 600 500 100 1200 FAX 100 100 0 200 Total 1000 800 200 2000
Press the Counter key to check the number of sheets printed and scanned. You can check the number of pages printed in each paper size by pressing [Printed Pages by Paper Size].
Scanned Pages Copy Originals: Print Status Page

Status
FAX 600 200
Others 1000
Total 1800
Printed Pages by Paper Size
Close
10/10/2008 10:10
11
OPERATION GUIDE
11-25
Management
Data Security Kit Operations

Installing the optional Data Security Kit adds [Data Security] on the System Menu. Refer to the Data Security Kit (E) OPERATION GUIDE on the bundled CD-ROM for descriptions of the [Data Security] options and the procedures for using them.
11-26
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix
Optional Equipment .........................................Appendix-2 Character Entry Method...................................Appendix-7 Paper .............................................................Appendix-10 Specifications .................................................Appendix-19 Glossary.........................................................Appendix-27
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-1
Optional Equipment
Overview of Optional Equipment
The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
Document Processor
Document Processor (Dual scan DP)
Document Table
Job Separator
Document Finisher
Paper Feeder
3,000 Sheet Paper Feeder
Appendix-2
OPERATION GUIDE
Key Counter
FAX Kit
FAX Expansion Memory
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-3
Document Processor
Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying. For document processor operation, refer to Loading Originals in the Document Processor on page 2-30.
Paper Feeder
Two additional cassettes identical to the printers double cassettes can be installed in the printer. Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1 and 2.
NOTE: Left cover 4 is located on the left side of the

paper feeder for use in clearing paper jams.
3,000 Sheet Paper Feeder

In addition to the printer's cassettes, you can also install an optional 3,000 sheet paper feeder capable of holding up to 3,000 sheets of A4 or B5 paper.
NOTE: The 3,000 sheet paper feeder features a removable cover on the left side of the feeder (left cover 4) for removing paper when a paper jam occurs.
Document Finisher
The document finisher holds a large quantity of finished copies. The finisher offers a convenient means of sorting. Sorted finished copies may also be stapled. For further details, refer to the document finisher Operation Guide.

This is a large-capacity document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts. For details, refer to the 3,000 Sheet Document Finisher Operation Guide. A mail box and folding unit are also available as options.
Appendix-4
OPERATION GUIDE
Job Separator
Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or, specify as the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and printing of the received fax data. There is a paper indicator in the front of the machine that shows whether there is paper in the Job Separator.
CAUTION: Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit. If the ejected paper slips or stacks unevenly, turn the paper in the cassette over and try again. NOTE:
To ensure that paper is delivered to the Job Separator, select the output destination or change the default setting. (For details, refer to the Paper Output on page 8-18.) When removing paper from the Job Separator, pull it out at an angle.
Key Counter
Use the key counter to monitor machine usage. The key counter offers a convenient solution for centralized management of copy volume for different departments in a large company.
Inserting the Key Counter

Insert the key counter securely into the key counter slot.
NOTE: When the key counter function is activated, copies can only be made when a key counter is inserted. If the key counter is not inserted, Insert key counter. will be displayed.
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-5
FAX Kit
By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a computer. When two FAX kits are installed, the units can be connected to two different telephone lines which will enable quicker message transmission to a number of recipients. If one of the lines is dedicated to receiving, the busy line time can be reduced. For further details, refer to Fax Kit Operation Guide.
Expansion Memory
Image storage memory (128 MB) that allows the machine to receive more pages of incoming faxed originals. Expansion memory should only be installed or removed by the service representative.
Data Security Kit

The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved. The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security because no data cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations.
Printed Document Guard Kit

This prevents the unauthorized copying and/or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information. When a document is printed from a computer, this feature imprints a special pattern on the document. When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine, the machine detects the pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank, prohibiting transmission.
Document Table
Place original or other documents when using the machine. It has a drawer to accommodate clips.
Appendix-6
OPERATION GUIDE
Character Entry Method

To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.
NOTE: QWERTY, QWERTZ and AZERTY are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Press the System Menu key, [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Keyboard Layout to choose desired layout. QWERTY layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.
Entry Screens
Lower-case Letter Entry Screen
2 1
Use the keyboard to enter. Limit: 126 characters Input: 0 characters Backspace 1 q a 2 w s z Upper-case x 3 e d c 4 r f v 5 t g b 6 y h n 7 u j m 8 i k , Space Cancel
Status
3 4
9 o l .
0 p ; /
! [ :
= ]
^ \
Lower-case
No./Symbol
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
10
11
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Display/Key Display Limit Display Cursor Key [Backspace] Keyboard [Upper-case] [Lower-case] [No./Symbol] [Space]
Description Displays entered characters. Displays maximum number of characters. Press to move the cursor on the display. Press to delete a character to the left of the cursor. Press a character to enter. Press to use upper-case letters. Press to use lower-case letters, Press to enter numbers and symbols. Press to insert a space.
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-7
No. 10 11
Display/Key [Cancel] [OK]
Description Press to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before the entry. Press to finalize entry and return to the screen before the entry.
Upper-case Letter Entry Screen
Use the keyboard to enter. Limit: 126 characters Input: 0 characters Backspace ! Q A Z Upper-case @ W S X # E D C $ R F V % T G B ^ Y H N & U J M * I K < Space Cancel
Status
( O L >
) P : ?
_ { "
+ }
No./Symbol
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
Number/Symbol Entry Screen
Use the keyboard to enter. Limit: 126 characters Input: 0 characters Backspace 1 $ ; | 2 % < } 3 & = Lower-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space Cancel
Status
4 >
5 ( ?
6 ) @
7 * [
8 + \
9 , ]
0 ^
! . _
" / `
# : {
12
Upper-case
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
No. 12 [
Display/Key ]/[ ]
Description To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard, press the cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to enter.
Appendix-8
OPERATION GUIDE
Entering Characters
Follow the steps shown below to enter List A-1 for example.
1 2
Use the keyboard to enter. L Limit: 126 characters Input: 1 characters Backspace ! Q A Z Upper-case @ W S X # E D C $ R F V % T G B ^ Y H N & U J M * I K < Space Cancel
Status
Press [Upper-case]. Press [L]. The letter L is shown on the display.
( O L >
) P : ?
_ { "
+ }
No./Symbol
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
3 4
Use the keyboard to enter. List Limit: 126 characters Input: 4 characters Backspace 1 q a z Upper-case 2 w s x 3 e d c 4 r f v 5 t g b 6 y h n 7 u j m 8 i k , Space Cancel
Status
Press [Lower-case]. Press [i], [s], [t] and [Space].
9 o l .
0 p ; /
! [ @
= ]
` \
Lower-case
No./Symbol
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
5 6 7 8 9
Use the keyboard to enter. List_A-1 Limit: 126 characters Input: 8 characters Backspace 1 $ ; | 2 % < } 3 & = Lower-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space Cancel
Status
Press [Upper-case]. Press [A]. Press [No./Symbol]. Press [ ] or [ ] repeatedly to view the keyboard containing [-] and [1]. Press [-] and [1].
4 >
5 ( ?
6 ) @
7 * [
8 + \
9 , ]
0 ^
! . _
" / `
# : {
Upper-case
OK
10/10/2008 10:10
10 Check that the entry is correct. Press [OK].
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-9
Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
Cassettes 1
Supported types Plain paper (60 to 163 g/m2) Recycled paper (60 to 163 g/m2) Plain paper (60 to 163 g/m2) Recycled paper (60 to 163 g/m2) Supported paper sizes Letter, Letter-R, Statement, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 16K, 16K-R Ledger, Legal, A3, B4, Oficio II, 8.5 13.5", 8K No. of sheets 500 (80 g/m2) 250 (80g/m2)
Cassettes 2 and the optional paper feeder

Supported types Plain paper (60 to 163 g/m2) Recycled paper (60 to 163 g/m2) Supported paper sizes Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Oficio II, 8.5 13.5", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R No. of sheets 500 (80g/m2)
Optional 3,000 sheet paper feeder

Supported types Plain paper (60 to 105 g/m2) Recycled paper (60 to 105 g/m2) Supported paper sizes Letter, A4, B5 No. of sheets 3,000 (80g/m2)
Multi Purpose tray (MP tray)

Supported types Plain paper (60 to 220 g/m2) Recycled paper (60 to 220 g/m2) Colored paper (60 to 220 g/m2) Supported paper sizes Letter, Letter-R, Executive-R, Statement, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 16K, 16K-R Other sizes: Portrait - 3 7/8 to 11 5/8" or 98 to 297 mm Landscape - 5 7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm Plain paper (60 to 220 g/m2) Recycled paper (60 to 220 g/m2) Colored paper (60 to 220 g/m2) Postcards Oufuku Hagaki (return postcard) Ledger, Legal, A3, B4, Oficio II, 8.5 13.5", 8K Postcards (100 148 mm) Return postcard (148 200 mm) 50 (80g/m2) No. of sheets 100 (80g/m2)
30
Appendix-10
OPERATION GUIDE
Supported types Envelopes
Supported paper sizes Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Monarch, ISO B5, Youkei 2, Youkei 4 Other sizes: Portrait - 3 7/8 to 11 5/8" or 98 to 297 mm Landscape - 5 7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4-R 10
No. of sheets
Transparency (OHP film)
10
Basic Paper Specifications

This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix. Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled. Supported Paper Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper. Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output. Basic Paper Specifications The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections for further details. Criteria Weight Specifications Cassettes: 60 to 163 g/m2 Multi purpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2 Thickness Dimensional accuracy Squareness of corners Moisture content Grain direction Pulp content 0.086 to 0.110 mm 0.7 mm 90 0.2 4 to 6% Long grain (paper supply direction) 80% or more
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-11
NOTE: Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.
Choosing the Appropriate Paper

This section describes guidelines for choosing paper. Condition Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however, avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit. Ingredient Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum. Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers. Supported Paper Sizes Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine. Measurements in the table take into account a 0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must be 90 0.2. Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray A3 (297 420 mm) B4 (257 364 mm) A4 (297 210 mm) A4-R (210 297 mm) B5 (257 182 mm) B5-R (182 257 mm) A5-R (148 210 mm) Folio (210 330 mm) Ledger
Multi Purpose Tray A6-R (105 148 mm) B6-R (128 182 mm) Hagaki (100148mm) Oufuku Hagaki (148 200 mm) Executive (7 1/4 10 1/2") Envelope DL (110 220 mm) Envelope C5 (162 229mm) Envelope C4 (229 324mm) ISO B5 (176 250 mm)
Appendix-12
OPERATION GUIDE
Multi Purpose Tray Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) (4 1/8 9 1/2") Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) (3 7/8 8 7/8") Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) (3 5/8 6 1/2") Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 7 1/2") Youkei 2 (114 162 mm) Youkei 4 (105 235 mm) Size Entry (98 148 to 297 432 mm)
Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray Legal Letter Letter-R Statement-R Oficio II 8.5 13.5" 8K (273 394 mm) 16K (273 197 mm) 16K-R (197 273 mm)
Smoothness The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams. Basis Weight In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly. The recommended basis weight is between 60 and 163 g/m2 for the cassettes and between 60 to 220 g/m2 for the multi purpose tray. Thickness Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once. Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick. The proper thickness is between 0.086 and 0.110 mm. Moisture Content Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is supplied, the electrostatic changeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres. Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast. Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%. To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-13
Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place. Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for a while. Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor. Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors. Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours. Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
Other Paper Specifications Porosity: The density of the paper fibers Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams. Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray. Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together. Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies. Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself. Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture. Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test. Glossy paper Watermarked paper Paper with an uneven surface Perforated paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media. The following paper and media can be used. Transparencies Preprinted paper Bond paper Recycled paper Thin paper (from 60 g/m2 to 64 g/m2 or less)
Appendix-14
OPERATION GUIDE
Letterhead Colored paper Prepunched paper Envelopes Cardstocks Thick paper (from 106 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 or less) Labels Coated paper High-quality paper
When using these paper and media, choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label paper. Choosing Special Paper Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper. Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper. Transparencies Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions. Criteria Heat resistance Thickness Material Dimensional accuracy Squareness of corners Specifications Must withstand at least 190C 0.100 to 0.110 mm Polyester 0.7 mm 90 0.2
To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the machine. If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-15
Hagaki Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams. Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki (available at post offices). Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Envelopes Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes. Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality. Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them. Keep the following points in mind. Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine. Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window. If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once. To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes, do not allow more than ten envelopes remain in the output tray at once. Thick Paper Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.
Burrs Burrs
NOTE: If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray
with the leading edge raised a few millimeters. Label Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray. For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
Appendix-16
OPERATION GUIDE
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble. Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of labels may cause more problems. The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels, resulting in a serious failure. Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output.
Allowed Top sheet Not allowed
Top sheet Adhesive layer Carrier sheet
Carrier sheet
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications. Item Top sheet weight Basis weight (overall paper weight) Top sheet thickness Overall paper thickness Moisture content Colored Paper Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix. In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200C or 392F). Preprinted Paper Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix. The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars. Specifications 44 to 74 g/m 104 to 151 g/m 0.086 to 0.107 mm 0.115 to 0.145 mm 4 to 6 % (composite)
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-17
Recycled Paper Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.
NOTE: Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality.
Appendix-18
OPERATION GUIDE
Specifications
NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Machine
Description Item 25/25 ppm model Desktop Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, tandem drum system Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: 11 17"/A3) Fixed 60 to 163 g/m2 (Duplex: 60 to 163 g/m2) 60 to 220 g/m2 Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as Simplex) Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 Maximum: 11 17"/A3 (Duplex: 11 17"/A3) Minimum: 5 1/2 8 1/2"/A5R (Duplex: 5 1/2 8 1/2"/A5R) Maximum: 11 17"/A3 Minimum: 5 1/2 8 1/2"/A6R Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments Auto mode: Preset Zoom 30/30 ppm model 40/40 ppm model 50/40 ppm model
Type Printing Method Supported Original Types Original Feed System Paper Weight Cassette 1, 2 Multi Purpose Tray Cassette 1, 2
Paper Type
Multi Purpose Tray Paper Size Cassette 1, 2 Multi Purpose Tray Zoom Level
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-19
Description Item 25/25 ppm model 30/30 ppm model 40/40 ppm model 50/40 ppm model
Printing Speed
Black and White copying A4/Letter A4R/LetterR A3/Ledger B4/Legal B5 Full color copying A4/Letter A4R/LetterR A3/Ledger B4/Legal B5
25 sheets/min 17 sheets/min 13 sheets/min 13 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
25 sheets/min 17 sheets/min 13 sheets/min 13 sheets/min 25 sheets/min 6.2 seconds or less 8.1 seconds or less 30 seconds or less 30 seconds or less 30 seconds or less
First Print Time (A4, feed from Cassette) Warm-up Time (22C/71.6F, 60%)
Black and White Full color
Power on Low Power Sleep
Paper Capacity
Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Multi Purpose Tray
500 sheets (80 g/m2, A4/Letter or less), 250 sheets (80 g/m2, B4/Legal or more) 500 sheets (80 g/m2) 100 sheets (80 g/m2, A4/Letter or less), 50 sheets (80 g/m2, more than Letter/A4) 250 sheets (80 g/m2) 150 sheets (80 g/m2) 1 to 999 sheets Semiconductor laser and electrophotography 2048 MB 2048 MB
Output Tray Capacity
Top tray with optional job separator
Continuous Copying Image Write System Main Memory Standard Maximum
Appendix-20
OPERATION GUIDE
Description Item 25/25 ppm model 30/30 ppm model 40/40 ppm model 50/40 ppm model
Hard Disk Interface Standard
80GB (standard)
160GB x 2 (standard)
USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed) USB memory slot: 2 (Full-Speed USB) Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX) KUIO/W slot: 2 600 600 dpi
Option Resolution Monthly Duty (Paper Size: A4 Paper Type: Plain) Operating Environment Average
5,000 pages
7,000 pages
10,000 pages
15,000 pages
Maximum
100,000 pages
130,000 pages
160,000 pages
200,000 pages
Temperature Humidity Altitude Brightness
10 to 32.5C/50 to 90.5F 15 to 80 % 2,500 m/8,202 ft maximum 1,500 lux maximum 23 53/64 26 49/64 29 11/32" (Main unit only) 605 680 745 mm 233.7 lb/106 kg
Dimension (W D H) Weight (without toner container and waste toner box) Space Required (W D) Power Source Options
35 26 49/64" (Using multi purpose tray) 889 680 mm 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 12 A/220 to 240 V AC, 50 Hz, 7.2 A Document processor, Paper feeder, 3,000 sheet paper feeder, Document finisher, 3,000 sheet document finisher, Job separator, Key counter, FAX kit, Expansion memory, Data Security Kit, Printed Document Guard Kit
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-21
Printer
Item Printing Speed First Print Time (A4, feed from Cassette) Black and White Same as Copying Speed. 25/25 ppm model : 6.2 seconds or less 30/30 ppm model : 6.2 seconds or less 40/40 ppm model : 5.3 seconds or less 50/40 ppm model : 4.9 seconds or less 25/25 ppm model : 8.1 seconds or less 30/30 ppm model : 8.1 seconds or less 40/40 ppm model : 6.9 seconds or less 50/40 ppm model : 6.9 seconds or less 600 dpi Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Apple Macintosh OS 10.x USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed) Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX) PRESCRIBE Description
Full color
Resolution Operating System Interface Standard
Page Description Language
Appendix-22
OPERATION GUIDE
Scanner
Item Operating System System requirements Resolution File Format Scanning Speed *1 Description Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP, Windows Vista CPU: 600Mhz or higher RAM: 128MB or more 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 100 dpi, 200 400 dpi (Resolution in FAX mode included) TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression), PDF (high compression) 25/25 ppm model 30/30 ppm model 1-sided B/W 30 Images/min Color 30 Images/min 2-sided B/W 30 Images/min Color 30 Images/min (A4 landscape, 600 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original) 1-sided B/W 50 Images/min Color 50 Images/min 2-sided B/W 50 Images/min Color 50 Images/min (A4 landscape, 600 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)
40/40 ppm model 50/40 ppm model
Interface Network Protocol Transmission System
Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX) TCP/IP PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB FTP Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL E-mail transmission SMTP Scan to E-mail TWAIN scan*2 WIA scan*3
*1 *2 *3
When using the dual scan document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning) Available Operating System : Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP, Windows Vista Available Operating System : Windows Vista
Document Processor (option)

Item Original Feed Method Supported Original Types Automatic feed Sheet originals Description
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-23
Item Paper Size Paper Weight Loading Capacity Dimensions (W) (D) (H) Weight Maximum: Ledger/A3 Minimum: Statement-R/A5-R 45 to 160 g/m2
Description
100 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum Mixed original sizes (auto selection): 30 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum 22 23/32 21 13/64 7 5/64" 577 534 180 mm 12 kg or less Dual scan DP model: 13 kg or less
Paper Feeder (option)

Item Paper Supply Method Paper Size Supported Paper Dimensions (W) (D) (H) Weight Description Friction Feed (No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes) Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.513.5", Letter, Letter-R, Executive, Executive-R, Statement-R, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R Paper weight: 60 - 163 g/m2 Media types: standard, recycled, color 23 1/32 23 15/64 12 13/32" 585 590 315 mm Approx. 57 lbs. / Approx. 26 kg
3,000 Sheet Paper Feeder (option)

Item Paper Supply Method Paper Size Supported Paper Dimensions (W) (D) (H) Weight Description Friction Feed (No. Sheets: 3,000 (80 g/m2) A4, B5, Letter Paper weight: 60 - 105 g/m2 Media types: standard, recycled, color 23 5/16 23 5/8 12 23/64" 585 600 314 mm Approx. 50.71 lbs / Approx. 23 kg
Appendix-24
OPERATION GUIDE
Document Finisher (option)

Item Number of Trays Paper Size (Non-stapling) Supported Paper Weight Maximum Sheets for Stapling Dimensions (W) (D) (H) Weight 1 tray Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.513.5", A3, B4, Folio, 8K: 500 sheets Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, 16K: 1,000 sheets Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.513.5", A3, B4, 8K: 25 sheets Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, 16K: 50 sheets (Paper weight 90 g/m2 or less) 25 20 63/64 40 5/16" 634.9 533 1013.5 mm Approx. 58.42 lbs. / Approx. 26.5 kg Description
3,000 Sheet Document Finisher (option)

Item Number of Trays Paper Size Tray A (NonStapling) Tray B Tray C Supported Paper Weight Maximum Sheets for Stapling Dimensions (W) (D) (H) Weight 3 trays Ledger, Legal, A3, B4, 8K: 1,500 sheets Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4R, B5, 16K: 3,000 sheets Folio, Ledger, Legal, 1218", A3, B4, 8K: 100 sheets Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 16K, 16KR: 200 sheets Letter, Statement-R, A4, B5, A5, A5R, 16K: 50 sheets Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.513.5", Folio, 8K: 30 sheets A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K: 50 sheets (Paper weight 90 g/m2 or less) 27 1/2 22 9/16 42 13/16" 687 573 1087mm Approx. 121.3 lbs / Approx. 55 kg Description
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-25
Job Separator (option)

Item Number of Trays Maximum Sheets Paper Size Paper Type Dimensions (W) (D) (H) Weight 1 tray 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.513.5", Letter, Letter-R, Executive, Executive-R, Statement-R, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R Paper weight: 60 - 163 g/m2 Paper type: plain, recycled, color, vellum 22 29/64 22 29/64 9 26/64" 570 570 240 mm 5.1 lbs. or less / 2.3 kg or less Description
Environmental Specifications
Item Time to Low Power mode (default setting) Time to Sleep mode (default setting) Recovery time from Low Power mode Recovery time from Sleep mode 5 minutes 30 minutes 30 seconds or less 25/25 ppm model : 30 seconds or less 30/30 ppm model : 30 seconds or less 40/40 ppm model : 45 seconds or less 50/40 ppm model : 45 seconds or less Standard 100% recycled paper may be used. Description
Duplexing Paper supply capability
NOTE: Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
Appendix-26
OPERATION GUIDE
Glossary
AppleTalk AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network. Auto Form Feed Timeout During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically put paper out. However, no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed. Auto Paper Selection A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing Auto Sleep Mode A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum. Bonjour Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour. Default Gateway This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing computers outside the network that you are on, When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address, data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned. DHCP (IPv6) DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-27
dpi(dots per inch) A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm). EcoPrint Mode A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal. Emulation The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of PCL6, KPDL, and KPDL (automatic). FTP(File Transfer Protocol) A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP, FTP is now frequently used on the Internet. Grayscale A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels: that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16 bits. Help A Help key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the Help key to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel. IP Address An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network. The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be between 0 and 255. IPP IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers.IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption. KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language) Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3. Multi Purpose (MP) Tray The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels.
Appendix-28
OPERATION GUIDE
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface) An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services. NetWare Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems. POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet. PostScript A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highlyfunctional graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies. PPM (prints per minute) This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute. Printer Driver The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is contained in the CD-ROM enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine. RA(Stateless) The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information is the Router Advertisement (RA). ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification". Send as E-mail A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected from the list or entered at each time. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers. Status Page The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source settings.
OPERATION GUIDE
Appendix-29
Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and, in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network address can indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address.When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off. TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network. TCP/IP (IPv6) TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission. TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interested Name) A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to the computers. The TWAIN compatible devices enable to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted on a large number of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software. USB (Universal Serial Bus)2.0 A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer. WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices.This function replaces what TWAIN used to do; the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.
Appendix-30
OPERATION GUIDE
Index
Index
Numerics
1-sided/2-sided Selection 5-11 3,000 sheet document finisher Appendix-4 3,000 sheet paper feeder Appendix-4 Send 5-23 Bonjour Appendix-27 Booklet from Sheets 4-29 Left side 4-29 Right side 4-30 Top binding 4-30 Border Erase Copy 4-27 Send 5-26 Bundled Items 2-2 Buzzer 8-4
A
Adjusting Density 5-20 Auto 3-13 Manual 3-13 Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 3-6 Adjustment/Maintenance 8-52 Auto Color Corrcection 8-56 Color Calibration 8-62 Color Calibration Cycle 8-60 Color Registration 8-56 Copy Density Adjustment 8-52 Correcting Fine Black Lines 8-54 Developer Refresh 8-63 Display Brightness 8-55 Drum Refresh 8-53 Gray Adjustment 8-60 Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-63 Print Density 8-53 Send/Box Density 8-53 Silent Mode 8-55 System Initialization 8-55 AppleTalk Appendix-27 Setup 2-12 Applications 8-81 Auto Image Rotation 4-43 Auto Low Power Mode 3-4 Auto Paper Selection Appendix-27 Auto Sleep 3-5, Appendix-27
C
Cassette Loading Paper 2-17 Paper Size and Media Type 8-7 Cassette 1 1-4 Cassette 2 1-4 Caution Labels ix CD-ROM 2-2 Centering 5-7 Changing Language 2-7, 8-2 Character Entry Method Appendix-7 Cleaning Dual scanning area 9-3 Glass Platen 9-2 Original Cover 9-2 Separator 9-4 Slit Glass 9-3 Transfer Roller 9-6 Cleaning Brush 1-5 Clip Holder 1-4 Color Background Density Adjust 4-21, 5-23 Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection 5-24 Color balance adjust 4-16 Color Calibration Cycle 8-60 Color Profiles 5-35
B
Background density adjust Copy 4-21
OPERATION GUIDE
Index-1
Index
Color Registration 8-56 Color Type 5-35, 8-38 Gray Adjustment 8-60 Hue adjust 4-17 One-touch image adjust 4-19 Single Color copy 4-15 Color balance adjust 4-16 Color Calibration 8-62 Color mode 3-8 Color Selection (Copy) 8-22 Color Selection (Send/Store) 8-22 Color type 5-35 Combine Mode 2-in-1 Mode 4-22 4-in-1 Mode 4-23 Page Boundary Lines 4-23 COMMAND CENTER 2-13 Connecting LAN Cable 2-5 Power Cable 2-6 USB Cable 2-6 Connection Method 2-3 Continuous Scan Copy 4-41 Send 5-25 Conventions in This Guide xxix Copy Appendix-6 Adjusting Density 3-13 Collate Copying 3-19 Duplex Copying 3-17 Interrupt Copy 3-22 Offset Copying 3-19 Originals 4-2 Reserve Copy 3-21 Selecting Image Quality 3-14 Setup 8-32 Zoom Copying 3-15 Copy Settings 8-32 Auto % Priority 8-34 Auto Paper Selection 8-33 Border Erase for Back Page 8-32 Paper Selection 8-33 Preset Limit 8-34 Quick Setup Registration 8-35 Reserve Next Priority 8-34 Copying Functions 4-1
Counting the Number of Pages Printed by Paper Size 11-23 Counter 11-25 Each Job 11-22 Printing a Report 11-24 Total Job 11-21 Unknown Account ID Jobs 11-25 Counting the Number of Pages Printed 11-20 Cover Mode 4-32 Custom Box Creating a New Box 6-2 Deleting Documents 6-9 Editing Documents 6-6 Join Documents 6-7 Move Documents 6-6 Printing Documents 6-5 Storing Documents 6-4 User Privileges 3-44
D
Date/Timer 8-64 Auto Error Clear 8-67 Auto Panel Reset 8-65 Auto Sleep 8-67 Date Format 8-65 Date/Time 8-64 Low Power Timer 8-66 Time Zone 8-65 Default 8-20 Auto Image Rotation 8-28 Border Erase 8-27 Collate/Offset 8-28 Color Selection (Copy) 8-22 Color Selection (Send/Store) 8-22 Color TIFF Compression Settings 8-30 Continuous Scan 8-20 Density 8-24 EcoPrint 8-29 E-mail Subject/Body 8-26 File Format 8-23 File Name 8-25 High Comp. PDF Image 8-30 Margin 8-27 Original Image 8-21
Index-2
OPERATION GUIDE
Index
Original Orientation 8-20 PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image 8-29 Repeat Copying 8-31 Scan Resolution 8-21 Zoom 8-24 Default Gateway Appendix-27 Default Screen 8-3 Density Adjustment Copy 3-13 Send 5-20 Destination 8-69 Adding 8-69 Adding a Group 8-72 Adding an individual 8-69 Choosing by One Touch Key 3-37 Choosing by Speed Dial 3-37 Choosing from the Address Book 3-35 Editing 8-74 One Touch Key 8-75 Quick No. Search key 3-9 Search 3-36 Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) 3-37 Device 7-17 Canceling FAX Communication 7-19 Checking Status 7-17 Configuring 7-18 Displaying Screen 7-17 USB Memory 7-18 DHCP Appendix-27 DHCP (IPv6) Appendix-27 Document Box 3-38, 6-1 Basic Operation 3-40 Custom Box 3-38, 6-2 Document deletion time 6-3 Job Box 3-38, 6-10 Quick Setup Registration 8-41 What is Document Box? 3-38 Document Finisher Appendix-4, Appendix-25 Document Guard 8-100 Document Processor Appendix-4, Appendix-23 How to Load Originals 2-31 Loading Originals 2-30 Not Supported Originals 2-31
Part Names 2-30 Supported Originals 2-31 Document Table Appendix-6 Double Copy 4-39 dpi Appendix-28 Duplex 3-17, 8-46
E
EcoPrint Mode Appendix-28 Copy 4-14 Print 8-45 E-mail Send as E-mail 3-30 Emulation Appendix-28 Selection 8-43 Energy Star Program xxvii Enter E-mail Subject and Body 5-29 Enter key 1-3, 3-9 Entry Body 5-29 Document Name 5-28 File Name 4-48, 5-28 Subject 5-29 Error Handling 8-16 Error Indicator 1-4 Error Messages 10-6 Expansion Memory Appendix-6
F
File Format 5-14 PDF 5-16 File Name 4-48 Front Cover 1-4 FTP Appendix-28 FTP Encrypted TX 5-34
G
Glass Platen Cleaning 9-2 GPL xxiv Gray Adjustment 8-60 Grayscale 5-24, Appendix-28
OPERATION GUIDE
Index-3
Index
Green Knob 1-6 Grounding the Machine xi
H
Handles 1-4 Help Appendix-28 Hue adjustment 4-17
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print Box 6-11 Repeat Copy Box 6-14 Job Finish Notice 5-31 Copy 4-46 Send 5-31 JPEG Print 8-40
K I
Image Quality Copy 3-12 Send 5-19 Image repeat copy 4-39 Included Guides 2 Installation Precautions x Interface Block 8-98 Internet Browser 8-78 Interrupt Clear Timer 8-68 Interrupt Copy 3-22 IP Address Appendix-28 IPP Appendix-28 Key Counter Appendix-5 KPDL Appendix-28
L
Label Appendix-16 LAN Cable Connecting 2-5 Left Cover 1 1-4 Left Cover 1 Lever 1-4 Left Cover 2 1-4 Left Cover 3 1-4 Legal Information xxii Login 3-7, 11-3 Logout 3-7, 11-3 Low Power Mode 3-5 Low Power Timer 8-66
J
Job Available Status 7-2 Canceling 3-46, 7-14 Checking History 7-9 Checking Status 7-2 Detailed Information 7-7 Detailed Information of Histories 7-10 Details of the Status Screens 7-3 Displaying History Screen 7-9 Displaying Status Screens 7-2 Pause and Resumption 7-13 Reordering 7-15 Sending the Job Log History 7-11 Job Accounting 11-10 Managing the Copier/Printer Counts 1114 Restricting the Use of the Machine 1115 Job Box Private Print/Stored Job Box 6-10
M
Main Power Switch 1-6 Management 11-1 Job Accounting 11-10 User Login Administration 11-2 Margin/Centering Mode 4-25 Memo Mode 4-35 Mirror Image 4-45 Mixed Sized Originals 4-8 Combinations 4-8 Copy Size 4-10 Send 5-8 Monotype Imaging License Agreement xxvi Multi Purpose (MP) Tray 1-6, Appendix-28 Paper Size and Media 2-26, 8-9 Multi Sending (Sending to Different Types of Destinations ) 3-37
Index-4
OPERATION GUIDE
Index
N
Negative Image 4-44 NetBEUI Appendix-29 NetWare 8-90, Appendix-29 Setup 8-90 Network Setup 2-10 Network Cable 2-4 Connecting 2-5 Network Interface 2-4 Network Security 8-95 Network Setup AppleTalk 2-12 FTP (Reception) 8-93 FTP (Transmission) 8-91 HTTP 8-93 HTTPS 8-93 IPP 8-92 IPP over SSL 8-93 LAN Interface 8-87 LDAP 8-93 LPD 8-93 NetBEUI 8-93 NetWare 8-90 POP3 (E-mail RX) 8-93 Raw Port 8-93 SMB (Transmission) 8-91 SMTP (E-mail TX) 8-93 SNMP 8-93 TCP/IP (IPv4) 8-87 TCP/IP (IPv6) 8-88 WSD Print 8-93 WSD Scan 8-93
O
OHP backing sheet mode 4-52 One Touch Key 8-75 One-touch image adjust 4-19 Open SSLeay xxiv Operation Panel 1-2, 1-4 Option 3,000 sheet document finisher Appendix-4 3,000 sheet paper feeder Appendix-4
Data Security Kit Appendix-6 Document Finisher Appendix-4 Document Processor Appendix-4 Document Table Appendix-6 Expansion Memory Appendix-6 FAX Kit Appendix-6 Job Separator Appendix-5 Key Counter Appendix-5 Overview Appendix-2 Paper Feeder Appendix-4 Option Interface Slot 1-6 Optional Functions 8-102 Orientation Confirmation 8-19 Original Loading in the Document Processor 2-30 Placing on the Platen 2-29 Size xxxi Original Cover 1-4 Cleaning 9-2 Original Orientation Copy 4-11 Document Processor 4-11 Orientation Confirmation 8-19 Send 5-12 Original Placement Indicator Indications and Status 2-32 Original Size Indicator Plates 1-4, 2-29 Original Size Selection Send 5-2 Original SSLeay License xxv Originals Automatic Detection 8-13 Copy 4-2 Custom 8-5 Setup 8-5 Size Selection 4-2, 5-2 Output Destination 4-13 Output Tray 8-18
P
Page Numbering 4-33 Paper Appropriate Paper Appendix-12 Auto Selection 8-14
OPERATION GUIDE
Index-5
Index
Before Loading 2-16 Cassette 8-7 Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7-16 Custom 8-6 Default Paper Source 8-13 Loading Envelopes 2-22 Loading in the Cassettes 2-17 Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2-20 Multi Purpose Tray 8-9 Paper Source for Cover Paper 8-14 Setup 8-5 Size and Media 2-24, Appendix-10 Special Paper 8-15, Appendix-14 Specifications Appendix-11 Weight 8-11 Paper Feed Unit 1-6 Paper Feeder Appendix-4 Paper Jam 10-13 Cassette 1 10-14 Cassette 2 10-15 Cassettes 3 and 4 10-16 Document Finisher 10-27 Document Processor 10-25 Duplex Unit 10-21 Duplex Unit and Cassette 1 10-22 Inside the Left Covers 1, 2 and 3 10-20 Jam Location Indicators 10-13 Multi Purpose Tray 10-17 Precaution 10-14 Paper Length Guide 2-17 Paper Selection 4-4 Cassette 4-4 Multi Purpose Tray 4-5 Paper Width Guides 2-18 Part Names 1-1 Platen 1-4 Placing Originals 2-29 POP3 Appendix-29 Poster 4-37 PostScript Appendix-29 Power Cable Connecting 2-6 Power Off 3-3 Power On 3-2 Power Supply xi
PPM Appendix-29 Precautions for Use xii Preparation 2-1 Preparing Cables 2-4 Print Job Reordering 3-47 Printed Document Guard Kit Appendix-6 Printer Setup 8-43 Printer Driver Appendix-29 Printer Settings 8-43 Color Setting 8-44 Copies 8-46 CR Action 8-48 Duplex 8-46 EcoPrint 8-45 Emulation 8-43 Form Feed Timeout 8-47 LF Action 8-48 Orientation 8-47 Override A4/Letter 8-45 Printing 3-27 Printing from Applications 3-27 Printing Reports/Sending Notice 8-49 Font List 8-49 Network Status Page 8-50 Service Status Page 8-50 Status Page 8-49 Transmission Result Reports 8-51 Priority Override 4-49, 7-14 Product Library 2-2 Programmed Copying 4-54 Editing and Deleting 4-55 Recalling 4-54 Registering 4-54
Q
Quick No. Search key 1-3, 3-9 Quick Setup Screen 3-47 Changing Registration 3-48, 8-35, 8-37, 8-41
R
RA (Stateless) Appendix-29
Index-6
OPERATION GUIDE
Index
Receive Indicator 1-4 Repeat Copy 4-50 Maximum Number 4-51 Outputting 4-51 Selecting 4-50 Replacement Toner Container 9-8 Waste Toner Box 9-8 Reserve Copy 3-21 Reserve Next Priority 8-34 Resolution Appendix-21, Appendix-22 Restarting the System 8-86
S
Safety Conventions i SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) xvi Scan Resolution 5-21 Default settings 8-21 Scanner Cleaning 8-63 Send File Format 5-14 Image Quality 5-19 Original Size Selection 5-2 Print 5-32 Sending Size Selection 5-4 Setup 8-37 Store 5-33 Sending Send as E-mail 3-30 Send to Folder (FTP) 3-33 Send to Folder (SMB) 3-32 Sending E-mail 2-14 Sending Functions 5-1 Sending Settings 8-37 Color Type 8-38 Quick Setup Registration 8-37 Sending Size Selection 5-4 Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) 3-37 Separator Cleaning 9-4 Setting Date and Time 2-8 Setting the Calibration Cycle 8-60 Setup AppleTalk 2-12
Copy 8-32 Date/Timer 8-64 NetWare 8-90 Network 8-87 Printer 8-43 Send 8-37 Sharpness adjust Copy 4-20 Send 5-22 Shortcuts 4-56 Adding 4-56 Single Color copy 4-15 Sleep 3-5 Slit Glass 1-4 Cleaning 9-3 SMTP Appendix-29 Solving Malfunctions 10-2 Specifications Document Finisher Appendix-25 Document Processor Appendix-23 Environmental Specifications Appendix-26 Job Separator Appendix-26 Machine Appendix-19 Paper Feeder Appendix-24 Printer Appendix-22 Scanner Appendix-23 Specifying Destination 3-35 Status / Job Cancel 7-1 Status Page 8-49, Appendix-29 Subnet Mask Appendix-30 Supplies Checking the Remaining Amount 7-16 Switching the Language 2-7, 8-2 Switching Unit of Measurement 8-16 Symbols i System Initialization 8-85 System Menu 8-1
T
TCP/IP Appendix-30 TCP/IP (IPv6) Appendix-27 Toner Container 1-5 Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7-16
OPERATION GUIDE
Index-7
Index
Replacement 9-8 Trade Names xxiii Transfer Roller Cleaning 9-6 TWAIN Appendix-30
W
Waste Toner Box 1-5 Replacement 9-8 Status 7-16 WIA Appendix-30 WSD Scan 5-30
U
USB Appendix-30 USB Cable Connecting 2-6 USB Interface 1-6, 2-4 USB Memory Printing Documents 6-16 Removing 6-17 Saving Documents 6-18 User Login Administration 11-2 Adding 11-4 Changing Properties 11-7 Enabling/Disabling 11-2 Login 11-3 Logout 11-4 Unknown login user name Job 11-9
X
XPS File formats 5-14, 8-23 Printing documents stored in Removable USB Memory 6-16 Saving documents to Removable USB Memory 6-18
Z
Zoom Copying Auto Zoom 3-15 Manual Zoom 3-15 Preset Zoom 3-15 XY Zoom 3-16 Zoom Mode Copy 3-15, 5-6 Send 5-6
Index-8
OPERATION GUIDE
A1
First edition 2008.10 Printed in China 302H756040

Taskalfa Operation Guide

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Taskalfa Operation Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Taskalfa Operation Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

250ci/300ci/400ci/500ci

Safety Conventions in This Guide

Be sure to read Precautions for Use before using this machine.

What you want to do

Copying with specific settings

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory

Print via a network

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)

Install the printer driver on your computer *1 Setup

Placing Originals on the Platen...2-29

Copying Functions ...4-1

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory... 6-16

Printing Printing from Applications ...3-27

What you want to do

Send to Folder (SMB)

Saving Documents to USB Memory

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)

Plug the USB memory

Create a shared folder on the destination computer. Setup

Place the originals on the platen

Sending ...3-29 *1 Sending Functions ...5-1

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ...6-18

What you want to do

FAX directly from a computer

Install the Network FAX Driver on your computer *1 Setup

FAX Operation (Basic) ...3-1 on the FAX System(Q) Operation Guide

About Network FAX ...9-1 on the FAX System(Q) Operation Guide

Caution / Warning Labels

Label inside the machine (Laser radiation warning)

Power supply/Grounding the machine

Handling of plastic bags

Precautions for Use

Cautions when handling consumables

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM

2. The CDRH Act

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power

Radio Tag Technology

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States)

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning

Legal and Safety Information

Regarding Trade Names

Open SSLeay License

Original SSLeay License

Monotype Imaging License Agreement

Energy Saving Control Function

Low Power Mode

Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR) Program

About this Operation Guide

Conventions in This Guide

Description of Operation Procedure

Originals and Paper Sizes

For the originals/paper, dimension A is shorter than B.

Icons on the Touch Panel

2 Preparation before Use

Preparation before Use

Check bundled items

Documents Contained in the Included CD-ROM